Download - Canon PC920 Service Manual
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
REVISION 0
FY8-13GA-000AUG. 1999
PC860F13-8491 TYA00001-
PC880F13-8291 TZA00001-
PC890F13-8242 UAA00001-
PC920F13-8431 TVB00001-F13-8441 PUD00001-
PUE00001-F13-8461 PUH00001-
PC921F13-8432 TVC00001-
PC940F13-8436 TVD00001-
PC941F13-8437 TVE00001-
PC950F13-8231 TVF00001-F13-8241 PUF00001-
PUG00001-
PC960F13-8434 TVG00001-
PC980F13-8232 TVH00001-
PC981F13-8233 TVJ00001-
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
IMPORTANT
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE
OF REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.
SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY
FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER
PRINTED MATTER.
ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED
TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAIN INFOR-
MATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Printed in JapanImprimé au Japon
Use of this manual should be strictly su-
pervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) i
This service manual has been prepared for the PC800/900 Series machines,providing basic information used for servicing the machines in the field so as to ensuretheir quality and performance.
This service manual consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1 General Description introduces the machine's features, specifications,names of parts, and how originals are reproduced.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation explains how copies are made on a step-by-step basis.
Chapter 3 Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for themachine's exposure system. It also explains the timing at which exposure-related mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 4 Image Formation System discusses the principles of operation used for themachine's image formation system. It also explains the timing at which imageformation-related mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 5 Pick-Up/Feeding System discusses the principles of operation used for themachine's pickup/feeding system. It also explains the timing at which pickup/feeding-related mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 6 Fixing System discusses the principles of operation used for the machine'sfixing system. It also explains the timing at which fixing-related mechanismsare operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled andadjusted.
Chapter 7 Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms discusses the principles of operation usedfor the machine's externals/auxiliary mechanisms. It also explains the timingat which auxiliary mechanism-related mechanisms are operated, and showshow they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 8 ADF explains the principles of operation of the ADF in view of electrical andmechanical functions and in relation to their timing of operation. It also showshow the unit may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 9 Installation introduces requirements for the site of installation, and showshow the machine may be installed using step-by-step instructions.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Servicing provides tables of periodically replaced parts andconsumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/adjustments, and problem identification (image fault/malfunction).
Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.
INTRODUCTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)i i
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and therelationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timingof operation.In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive—where a signal nameaccompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric sig-nal.The expression “turn on the power” means flipping on the power switch, closing thefront door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machinewith power.
2. In the digital circuits, ‘1’ is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is“High,” while ‘0’ is used to indicate “Low.” (The voltage value, however, differs fromcircuit to circuit.)In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checkedin the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machinesare not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DCcontroller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice forproduct improvement or other reasons, and major changes will be communicated in theform of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of thisService Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify andisolate faults in the machine.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) i i i
Model
PC860PC880PC890PC920PC920PC920PC920PC921PC940PC941PC950PC950PC950PC960PC980PC981
Typecode
TYATZAUAAPUDPUEPUHTVBTVCTVDTVEPUFPUGTVFTVGTVHTVJ
Multi-feeder
√√
√√√√√√
Singlefeeder
√
√√√√√√√
Zoom
√√√√√√√
√
√√√√√
Defaultratio
2R2E2R2E2R2E2R2E2R2E2R2E3R1E3R1E3R1E3R1E2R2E2R2E3R1E3R1E3R1E3R1E
ADFas
standard
√
√√√
Cassette
250 sheets250 sheets250 sheetsUniversalUniversalUniversalUniversalUniversalUniversalUniversalUniversalUniversal500 sheetsUniversal500 sheets500 sheets
Copyingspeed
(cpm) atDirect
12121210101010101313121213101313
The notation “√” indicates that the item in question is available.
• This service manual covers the models shown in the following table. Be sure to have agood understanding of the difference from model to model before referring to thismanual.
Density
correctionswitch
(SW101)
√√√√√√
√√
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)i v
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) v
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I. FEATURES ..................................1-1II. SPECIFICATIONS .......................1-2
A. Copier ....................................1-2B. ADF .......................................1-8
III. NAMES OF PARTS ................... 1-10A. External View ..................... 1-10B. Cross Section ..................... 1-13
IV. USING THE MACHINE ............. 1-15A. Control Panel...................... 1-15
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCEBY THE USER .......................... 1-17
VI. IMAGE FORMATION ................ 1-20A. Outline ................................ 1-20
I. BASIC OPERATIONS ..................2-1A. Functional Construction ........2-1B. Outline of Electrical
Circuitry .................................2-2C. Basic Sequence of
Operations .............................2-3
D. Controlling the Main Motor(M1) .......................................2-5
E. Inputs to and Outputs fromthe DC Controller ..................2-7
I. OPERATIONS ..............................3-1A. Outline ...................................3-1B. Varying the Reproduction
Ratio ......................................3-2C. Lens Drive System ................3-3D. Scanner Drive System ..........3-4
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM .................3-9
A. Controlling the ScanningLamp .....................................3-9
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 3-12A. Scanner Drive Assembly .... 3-13B. Lens Drive Assembly ......... 3-31C. Exposure System ............... 3-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)v i
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
I. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ...4-1A. Outline ...................................4-1B. Timing Chart for the Image
Formation System .................4-3C. Controlling the Primary
Charging Roller Bias .............4-4D. Controlling the Transfer
Roller Bias .............................4-8E. Controlling the Developing/
Separation Static EliminatorBias .................................... 4-11
F. Measuring the Density ofOriginals ............................. 4-16
G. Controlling the Side BlankingMechanism ......................... 4-21
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 4-22A. Cartridge ............................ 4-23B. Transfer Charging
Assembly ............................ 4-25C. Blank Exposure .................. 4-26
I. PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM.......5-1A. Outline ...................................5-1B. Controlling the Pickup
Roller .....................................5-3C. Controlling the Movement of
Paper .....................................5-9D. Detecting Jams .................. 5-12
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 5-18
A. Pickup Assembly ................ 5-19B. Multifeeder Assembly ......... 5-28C. Single-feeder Assembly ..... 5-31D. Feeding Assembly .............. 5-33E. Registration Roller
Assembly ............................ 5-34F. Delivery Assembly .............. 5-36
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
I. OPERATIONS ..............................6-1A. Outline ...................................6-1B. Controlling the Fixing
Temperature ..........................6-3
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 6-10A. Fixing Assembly ................. 6-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) vi i
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
CHAPTER 8 ADF
I. FANS ............................................7-1II. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM .........7-3
A. Outline of the Power SupplySystem ..................................7-3
B. Power Supply Circuit .............7-4C. Detecting an Error on
the Composite Power SupplyPCB .......................................7-6
D. Protecting the Power SupplyCircuit ....................................7-6
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ........7-7A. External Covers .....................7-8B. Control Panel...................... 7-15C. Copyboard Glass ............... 7-16D. Main Motor/Main Drive
Assembly ............................ 7-17E. Electrical System ............... 7-21
I. ADF ..............................................8-1A. Outline ...................................8-1B Basic Construction ................8-2C. Basic Operations ...................8-4D. Detecting an Original ............8-6E. Pickup Operation ...................8-8F. Delivery .............................. 8-12G. Controlling the Pickup
Motor .................................. 8-14
H. Controlling the Belt Motor .. 8-15I. Detecting Original Jams ..... 8-16J. Power Supply ..................... 8-17
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 8-18A. Removing the ADF ............. 8-19B. External Covers .................. 8-21C. Drive System ...................... 8-23D. Feeding System ................. 8-26E. Electrical System ............... 8-33
I. SELECTING A SITE ....................9-1II. UNPACKING AND
INSTALLATION ............................9-2A. Unpacking and Installation ....9-2
B. Placing Copy Paper...............9-9III. MOVING THE MACHINE .......... 9-12
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACEDPARTS ....................................... 10-1
II. DURABLES ANDCONSUMABLES ...................... 10-1
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING ....... 10-1IV. STORING AND HANDLING
THE CARTRIDGE ..................... 10-2
A. Storing the Cartridge with thePackaging Seal Intact ........ 10-2
B. Storing and Handling theCartridge with the PackagingSeal Removed .................... 10-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)viii
APPENDIX
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
I. MAINTENANCE ANDINSPECTION ............................ 11-3A. Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure ........................... 11-3B. Points to Note for
Servicing ............................ 11-4II. STANDARDS AND
ADJUSTMENTS ....................... 11-5A. Mechanical ......................... 11-5B. ADF .................................. 11-30C. Electrical ........................... 11-41
III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGEFAULTS ................................... 11-48A. Making Initial Checks ....... 11-48B. Sample Image Faults ....... 11-52C. Troubleshooting Image
Faults ................................ 11-53IV. TROUBLESHOOTING
MALFUNCTIONS.................... 11-61
A. TroubleshootingMalfunctions ..................... 11-61
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDINGPROBLEMS ............................ 11-75A. Copy Paper Jam ............... 11-75B. Faulty Feeding .................. 11-78
VI. ARRANGEMENT ANDFUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICALPARTS ..................................... 11-79A. Sensors and Solenoids .... 11-79B. Switches ........................... 11-80C. Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc. 11-81D. PCBs ................................ 11-82E. ADF .................................. 11-83F. Variable Resistors (VR) and
Check Pins by PCB .......... 11-84VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS .................. 11-86
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1B. SIGNALS AND
ABBREVIATIONS ....................... A-3C. GENERAL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................... A-5D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................... A-7E. ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-15F. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-19G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-27H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-29
I. SENSOR CIRCUITDIAGRAM ................................. A-30
J. NOISE FILTER CIRCUITDIAGRAM ................................. A-31
K. HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACTCIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-32
L. BLANK EXPOSURE (front)CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-33
M. BLANK EXPOSURE (rear)CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-34
N. SPECIAL TOOLS ...................... A-35O. SOLVENTS/OILS ...................... A-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This chapter provides specifications of the machine, instructions on how to operatethe machine, and an outline of copying process.
I. FEATURES ..................................1-1II. SPECIFICATIONS .......................1-2
A. Copier ....................................1-2B. ADF .......................................1-8
III. NAMES OF PARTS ................... 1-10A. External View ..................... 1-10B. Cross Section ..................... 1-13
IV. USING THE MACHINE ............. 1-15A. Control Panel...................... 1-15
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCEBY THE USER .......................... 1-17
VI. IMAGE FORMATION ................ 1-20A. Outline ................................ 1-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-1
I. FEATURES
1. Personal Copier with a Zoom Function and a Fixed Copyboard• You can choose either a default enlargement/reduction ratio or any ratio between 70% and
141% in 1% increments.
2. Ecology-Conscious• The use of a roller charging method has resulted in a considerable reduction of ozone: 0.01
ppm or less on the average, 0.02 ppm or less at maximum (1/100 to 1/1000 compared withexisting Canon machines).
3. SURF Fixing Assembly• The wait time is 0 sec (at 20°C room temperature), enabling speedy copying work immedi-
ately after power-on.
4. Various Paper Sizes• The paper may be between A4 (LGL) and A5 (STMT) (*Using the universal cassette).• In manual feed mode, paper may be as large as A4 (LGL) or as small as a business card.
5. All-in-One Cartridge for Simple Maintenance• The photosensitive drum, toner case, charging roller, developing assembly, and cleaning as-
sembly are constructed as a single entity (cartridge).The user may expect quality copy images at all times as long as he/she performs simplereplacement/cleaning work.
6. Large Paper Source• The source of paper may contain as many as 550 sheets of paper (500-sheet cassette +
multifeeder; multifeeder type).
7. Separate top unit• The machine’s top unit may be opened to make jam removal easy.
8. ADF Type• Continuous copying is possible with the use of the ADF.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-2
II. SPECIFICATIONS
A. Copier
1. Type
DescriptionsDesk top
Fixed
Halogen lamp (80 V/110 W for 120V-model; 150 V/160 Wfor 220/240 V-model)
Fixed focal point lens
OPC drum (24-mm dia.)
ItemBody
Copyboard
Source of light
Lens
Photosensitive medium
Table 1-201
2. Mechanisms
DescriptionsIndirect static reproduction
Roller (direct charging)
Slit (moving light source)
Auto or manual
Dry (toner projection)
Cassette (1 pc.)Single-feeder (single-feeder type)Multifeeder (multifeeder type)
Curvature separation + static eliminator
Flat heater
Blade
Center reference (copyboard)
ItemReproduction
Charging
Exposure
Copy density adjustment
Development
Pickup
Separation
Fixing
Cleaning
Original orientation
Table 1-202
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-3
3. Performance
DescriptionsSheet, book, 3-D object (2kg max.)
A4 (297 × 210 mm)/LGL (216 × 356 mm)
Inch/AB-configuration: 2R2E Inch-configuration: 3R1E
70% to 141% (in 1% increments*1)
0 sec (at 20°C room temperature)
10 sec or less (at 20°C room temperature; Direct, non-AE,from the cassette)
100 (max.)
A4/LGL (297 × 210 mm/216 × 356 mm max.)Business card (90 × 55 mm, min.)
Cassette:Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper (SM-1, A4R/B5R), colored paper, recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2; A4R/B5R), eco paper (80 g/m2; A4R)
Manual Feeder:Plain paper (52 to 128 g/m2), tracing paper (SM-1, GNT-80*2; A4R/B5R), transparency*2,*4 (A4R/LTRR*3), coloredpaper, business card (200 g/m2 or less), label sheet*2 (A4R/LTRR), recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2; A4R/B5R), eco pa-per (80 g/m2; A4R), postcard*3
Double-Sided/Overlay Copying*5:Plain paper (64 to 128 g/m2), colored paper, business card(200 g/m2 or less), recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2; A4R/B5R), eco paper (80 g/m2; A4R), postcard*3
With clawsUniversal cassette (250 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper; A4/LGL toA5/STMT)250-sheet cassette (250 sheets of 80 g/m2)500-sheet cassette (500 sheets of 80 g/m2)
5 mm deep (approx.; 50 sheets of 80 g/m2)
100 sheets (A4; 80 g/m2)
Leading edge: 2.0 ±1.5 mm (Direct; 4.0 mm or less otherwise)Left/right: 0.0 +2.0, -0.0 mm (0 +4.0, -0.0 mm for LTR)
Provided (5 min, approx.; fixed)*6
ItemOriginal type
Maximum original size
Reproduction ratio
Zoom
Wait time
First copy time
Continuous copying
Copy size
Copy paper type
Cassette
Multifeeder tray
Copy tray
Non-image width
Auto power-off
Table 1-203
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-4
*1. Applies only to models with a zoom function.*2. Applies only to single pickup if the multifeeder is used.*3. Applies only to vertical feeding.*4. Upon delivery, be sure to remove each from the copy tray.*5. Be sure to remove any curling before feeding for a second time.*6. If stopped because paper ran out during copying operation, 1 hr.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-5
4. Others
Descriptions
7.5°C to 32.5°C/44.5°F to 90.5°F5% to 85% RH607.95 to 1013.25 hPa (0.6 to 1 atm)
120 V 60 Hz 220/240 V 50 Hz, 60 Hz
TVBxxxxx PUDxxxxx PUHxxxxxTVCxxxxx PUExxxxxTVDxxxxx PUFxxxxxTVExxxxx PUGxxxxxTVFxxxxx TYAxxxxxTVGxxxxx TZAxxxxxTVHxxxxx UAAxxxxxTVJxxxxx
0.9 kW or less Standby: 1.2W (approx.; about 5min; reference only) Copying: 0.4kWh (approx.; reference only)
Standby: -(sound power level by ISO)Copying: (sound power level by ISO)• Single-feeder type: 68 dB or less• Multifeeder type: 66 dB or less
0.01 ppm or less (average; 0.02 ppm or less, max.)
Copyboard Type484.9 × 448.2 × 297.5 mm*1/ 329.0 mm*2
19.1 in. × 17.6 in × 11.7 in*1/ 13.0 in*2
ADF Type484.9 × 448.2 × 358.3 mm*1/ 389.8 mm*2
19.1 in × 17.6 in × 14.1 in*1/ 15.3 in*2
Copyboard TypeSingle-feeder type:19.3 kg*1/ 42.5 lb*1, 20.9 kg*2/ 46.0 lb*2
Multifeeder type: 19.5 kg*1/ 42.9 lb*1, 21.1 kg*2/ 46.4 lb*2
ADF TypeSingle-feeder type: 23.8 kg*1/ 52.4 lb*1, 25.2 kg*2/ 55.4 lb*2
Multifeeder type: 24.0 kg*1/ 52.8 lb*1, 25.4 kg*2/ 55.9 lb*2
Copy paper: Keep wrapped, and protect against humidity.Toner: Avoid direct sunlight, and store at 40°C/104°F, 85%
or less.
ItemOperating condition
TemperatureHumidityAtmospheric pressure
Power source
Serial number
Maximum power consumption
Noise
Ozone
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Weight (including the cassette)
Consumables
Table 1-204
*1. 250-sheet cassette type*2. 500-sheet cassette type
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-6
5. Default Ratios
Table 1-205
2R2E (Inch/AB-configuration)1:1.000
1:0.707
1:0816
1:1.154
1:1.414
ItemDirect
Reduce I
Reduce II
Reduce III
Reduce IV
Enlarge I
Enlarge II
3R1E (Inch-configuration)1:1.000
1:0.707
1:0.786
1:0.860
1:1.414
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-7
6. Copying Speed
Table 1-206
*1. The number of copies starting with the pickup operation that follows the delivery of the19th copy in a continuous copying job. (See p.5-8)
The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
Number of copies( Multifeeder*1)(Copies / min)
13 (9)11 (8)13 (9)13 (9)13 (9)13 (9)10 (9)12 (9)12 (9)12 (9)12 (9)12 (9)12 (9)10 (9)10 (9)10 (9)10 (9)10 (9)10 (9)10 (9)
10 m(9)10 (9)
910 (9)10 (9)10 (9)10 (9)
9
Copy size
LTRRLGL
STMTRMIN
LGL → LTRRMARJIN
MAXA4RB5RA5R
A4R → A5RB5R → A5RB5R → A4RA5R→ A4R
A4RB5RA5R
A4R → A5RB5R → A5RB5R → A4RA5R → A4R
LTRRLGL
STMTRMIN
LGL → LTRRMARJIN
MAX
Reproduction ratio
Direct
Reduce I (70.7%)Reduce II (78.6%)Reduce IV (86.0%)Enlarge II (141.4%)
Direct
Reduce I (70.7%)Reduce III (81.6%)Enlarge I (115.4%)Enlarge II (141.4%)
Direct
Reduce I (70.7%)Reduce III (81.6%)Enlarge I (115.4%)Enlarge II (141.4%)
Direct
Reduce I (70.7%)Reduce II (78.6%)Reduce III (86.0%)Enlarge II (141.4%)
Copying speedat Direct
13
12
10
10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-8
B. ADF
Table 1-207
DescriptionsAuto pickup/delivery
Face-down
Center reference
Top separation
Single-sided (50 to 128 g/m2)A5 (STMT) to A4R (LTRR), LGLLength: 139.7 to 355.6 mm (feeding direction)Width: 139.7 to 215.9 mm
30 sheets (80 g/m2 or less; about 3 mm in height)
Single-sided original to single-sided copy
Yes (in feeding direction)
No
Yes
446 mm/sec
IPC
Width: 474 mm/ 18.7 in.(659 mm/ 25.9 in. with the tray open)
Depth: 394 mm/ 15.5 in.Height: 74 mm/ 2.9 in. (216 mm/ 8.5 in. with the tray open)
5 kg/ 11 lb (approx.)
24 VDC and 5 VDC (from the host)
40 W or less
Temperature: same as the hostHumidity: same as the host
ItemOriginal pickup
Original orientation
Original position
Original separation
Original type
Stack
Original processing mode
Original size detection
Mixed original sizes
Original detection
Original feeding speed
Communication with host
Dimensions
Weight
Power source
Maximum power consumption
Operating environment
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-9
*1. The following may not be used as an original:• Sheet with a staple, clip, or glue.• Sheet with a cut, hole, or tear.• Sheet with holes for binding.• Sheet with a carbon back.• Sheet with a cut-and-paste piece.• Sheet with curling, bending, or wrinkling.
The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-10
[1] Copy tray[2] Power cord connector[3] Open/close lever
[1] Copyboard cover[2] Static eliminator cleaner[3] Manual feed tray
[4] Right door[5] Cassette[6] Copyboard glass
[4] Static eliminator[5] Copy density correction switch[6] Delivery guide plate
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[1]
[4]
III. NAMES OF PARTS
A. External View
1. Copyboard Type
Figure 1-301
Figure 1-302
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-11
[1] ADF[2] Manual feed tray[3] Right door
[1] Static eliminator cleaner[2] Delivery guide plate[3] Copy tray[4] Power cord connector
[4] Cassette[5] Copyboard glass
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5] Open/close lever[6] Static eliminator[7] Copy density correction switch
[7]
[6][5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
2. ADF Type
Figure 1-303
Figure 1-304
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-12
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
3. ADF
Figure 1-305
[1] Original tray[2] Original delivery tray
[3] Slide guide[4] Auxiliary tray
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-13
[1] No. 3 mirror[2] No. 2 mirror[3] No. 1 mirror[4] Scanning lamp[5] Heat exhaust fan[6] Copyboard glass[7] Side blanking lamp[8] Lens[9] Primary charging roller[10] No. 6 mirror
[11] Cartridge[12] No. 4 mirror[13] No. 5 mirror[14] Multifeeder tray[15] Vertical path roller[16] Multifeeder pickup roller[17] Cassette pickup roller[18] Registration roller[19] Developing cylinder[20] Photosensitive drum
[21] Transfer roller[22] Feed belt[23] Cassette[24] Fixing upper unit[25] Fixing lower roller[26] Cleaning roller[27] Delivery roller[28] Copy tray[29] Single-feeder pickup roller
[1]
[28] [27] [26] [25] [24] [23] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [29][16] [15]
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
B. Cross Section
1. Body
Figure 1-306
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-14
[1] Delivery roller[2] Copy tray[3] Pickup roller 2[4] Pickup roller 1[5] Copyboard tray[6] Auxiliary tray[7] Guide plate
[8] Separation pad[9] Registration roller[10] Feed belt drive roller[11] Feed belt[12] Feed belt roller[13] Feed belt link slave roller
[6][5][4][3][2][1]
[13] [12] [11] [9] [8] [7][10]
2. ADF
Figure 1-307
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-15
DescriptionAdjusts the density of copiesmanually.
Indicates the selected copy den-sity mode.
Indicates the selected default ra-tio.
Indicates the selected cassette/manual feed tray.If there is nopaper loaded, it flashes.
Flashes in response to a jam.
• Indicates the number of copiesor reproduction ratio.
• The symbol “%” turns onwhen indicating a ratio.
Stops copying or returns copy-ing mode to standard mode.
Starts copying.
Turns on and off the power.
No.1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Remarks
100 (max.; continuouscopying)
Standard ModeRatio: 100%Count: 1Paper source: cassetteCopy density: auto
mode
NameCopy density adjusting lever
Copy density mode indicator
Default ratio indicator
Paper selection indicator*1
Jam indicator
Count/ratio indicator
Clear/stop key
Copy start key
Power switch
[8] [9][7][6][1]
[15] [14] [12] [10][11][13]
[5][4][3][2]
IV. USING THE MACHINE
A. Control Panel
Figure 1-401
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-16
DescriptionNo. RemarksName10
11
12
13
14
15
Count/zoom set key
Zoom indicator*2
Zoom key*2
Paper selection key*1
Default ratio key
Copy density mode selectionkey
Sets the number of copies or azoom ratio.
Turns on when zoom mode isselected.
Selects/deselects zoom mode.
Selects the cassette/ manualfeed tray.
Selects a default reproductionratio.
Selects copying density mode.
May be between 70%and 141% in 1% incre-ments.
Table 1-401
*1. Applies only to a multifeeder model.*2. Applies only to a model equipped with a zoom function.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-17
Zoom
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER
Instruct the user to clean the following if images tend to be soiled or copy paper tends to jamoften.1. Soiled Imagesa. Copyboard Glass/Copyboard Cover
Clean the cover with a moist cloth (with water or mild detergent solution); then, dry wipe it.
b. Feeding Belt (ADF type)b.1 Cleaning in Feeder Cleaning Mode1) Turn on the machine, and hold down the Copy Density Mode Selection key for 4 sec or
more.• The count/ratio indicator will indicate ‘U6’.
Figure 1-501
2) Place about 10 sheets of blank copy paper (A4/LTR) on the original tray of the ADF.3) Press the Copy Start key.
• Copy paper will be fed from the original tray.• The indicator flashes ‘U6’ while the feeder is being cleaned.
4) Press the Copy Density Mode Selection key to end the mode.
Caution:• You cannot start feeder cleaning mode while the machine is making copies or if an error
exists.• The auto power-off mechanism does not operate while feeder cleaning mode is being
executed.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-18
b.2 Cleaning by Hand1) Wipe the feed belt with a moist cloth (water or mild detergent solution) in the direction of
the arrow in the figure; then, dry wipe it.
Figure 1-502
2. If Jams Occur Frequentlya. Static Eliminator1) Remove the static eliminator cleaner from the machine.
Figure 1-503 (Copyboard type)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-19
Figure 1-504 (ADF type)
2) Pull the open/close lever to open the machine.3) Using the static eliminator cleaner, clean the static eliminator.
• Brush out the paper lint or the like from the groove of the static eliminator.
Figure 1-505
4) Close the machine as soon as you have finished cleaning. (Work briskly.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)1-20
Scanning lamp Copyboard glass
Fixed focal point lens
Side blanking lamp(front, rear)
Developing blade
Developing cylinder
Primary charging roller
Cleaning blade
Transfer charging roller
Static eliminator
Fixing assembly
Photosensitive drum
VI. IMAGE FORMATION
A. OutlineThe construction of the machine is as follows:
Figure 1-601
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-21
The machine’s image formation process consists of the following seven steps:Step 1 Primary charging (AC + negative DC)Step 2 Image exposureStep 3 Development (AC + negative DC)Step 4 Transfer (negative DC)Step 5 Separation (curvature separation + static eliminator; positive DC)Step 6 FixingStep 7 Drum cleaning
Figure 1-602
Delivery
: Flow of copy paper : Rotation of the photosensitive drum
4. Transfer
Static latent image formation block
2. Image exposure
3. Development7. Drum cleaning
Registration6. Fixing 5. Separation
1. Primary charging
Cassette
Manual feed
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATION
This chapter provides descriptions on basic operations, functions of each operation,relationships between electrical and mechanical systems, and timing at which eachassociated part is turned on.
Process speed 96 mm/sec
I. BASIC OPERATIONS ..................2-1A. Functional Construction ........2-1B. Outline of Electrical
Circuitry .................................2-2C. Basic Sequence of
Operations .............................2-3
D. Controlling the Main Motor(M1) .......................................2-5
E. Inputs to and Outputs fromthe DC Controller ..................2-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-1
I. BASIC OPERATIONS
A. Functional Construction
The machine consists of four functional blocks: pickup/feeding system, exposure system, im-age formation system, and control system.
Figure 2-101
Control system
Control panel
Control circuitOriginal
illuminating block
Copyboard
Exposure system
Image formation systemPrimary charging
roller
Drum cleaning block Developing
assembly
Photosensitive drum
Manual feed block
Pickup/feeding system
Pickupcontrol block
Transfer/separation
Feeding
Fixing assembly/delivery assembly
Copy tray
Cassette
Optical block
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)2-2
B. Outline of Electrical Circuitry
The machine’s major electric mechanisms are controlled by the microprocessor mounted onthe DC controller PCB, which reads input signals from sensors and operating keys according to theinstructions of the program stored in advance and sends signals used to drive motors, solenoids,lamps, and other loads as needed.
Figure 2-102
SensorQ101CPU
Q900CPU
Scanning lamp
Fixing heater
ContactPCB
High-voltage circuitblock
+5V+24V
Main motordriver PCB
Solenoid
Side blankinglamp
Scanner/lens drive motor
Scanner cooling fan
Powerswitch
Mainmotor
Sensor/switch
ADF load
Controlpanel
Thermistor
AE sensor PCB
• Scanner home position detection• Lens home position detection• Pre-registration roller paper detection• Delivery paper detection• Vertical path roller paper detection• Single-feeder paper detection
• Scanner thermistor• Fixing thermistor
<Loads><Sensor Block> <Control Block>Composite
power supply PCBDC controller PCB
• Primary charging roller• Developing cylinder• Transfer charging roller• Static eliminator
• Pickup clutch solenoid• Registration clutch solenoid• Lens solenoid• Multifeeder pickup solenoid• Cassette pickup solenoid
ADF
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-3
C. Basic Sequence of Operations• A4R, Direct, 2 Copies, Continuous, Cassette
I : Scanner home position detectionII : Lens home position detection
Figure 2-103
Copy Start keyPower switchONON
STBY INTR AER SCFW
Forward
SCFWSCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Primary AC bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
Fixing heater (H1)
Primary DC bias
Developing AC bias
0.3sec (approx.)
Developing DC bias
Scanner
SCRV
ReverseI II I
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)2-4
Table 2-101
STBY(standby)
INTR(initial rotation)
AER(AE rotation)
SCFW(scanner forward)
SCRV(scanner reverse)
LSTR(last rotation)
• From when he power switch is turnedon to when the Copy Start key ispressed.
• From when LSTR ends to when theCopy Start key is pressed.
From when the Copy Start key ispressed to when the scanner moves for-ward.
While the scanner moves forward about10 cm and then moves it in reverse.
While the scanner is moving forward.• The distance varies according to the
selected copy size and reproductionratio.
• The forward speed varies according tothe selected reproduction ratio.
While the scanner is moving in reverse.• The reverse speed is about 3.3 as fast
as the forward speed used in Direct.
From when SCRV ends to when themain motor stops.
DescriptionWaits until the Copy Start key ispressed.
Removes residual charges from thephotosensitive drum, thereby ensuringa stable drum sensitivity.
Measures the density of the original.
Illuminates the original by the scanninglamp, and the reflected optical image isprojected to the photosensitive drumthrough mirrors and lenses.
Moves the scanner to the home positionin preparation for the next copying run.
Neutralizes the drum surface potentialas post-processing.
Period
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-5
D. Controlling the Main Motor (M1)
1. OutlineTable 2-102 shows the functions of the main motor control circuit, and Figure 2-104 is a block
diagram of the circuit.
Table 2-102
Figure 2-104
CompositepowersupplyPCB
DCcontroller
PCB
Phasecontroldrivecircuit
Reference signal
Drivecurrent
Hall IC output
MMCLK
Clock pulsegenerator
Main motor(M1)
Main motor drive PCB
J205-4
-3
-2
-1
+24V J901-1
-2
-3
-4
J103-6
J203-3
J104-1
J204-7
24V
GND
MMD
MLOCK
ItemPower supply
Drive signal
Moving/drive parts
Control
Error detection
Description24 VDC from the composite power supply.
Signal (MMD) from the DC controller PCB.
Photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing assembly,transfer charging roller, pickup roller, vertical roller, registration roller,feeding assembly, fixing assembly, delivery roller, heat exhaust fan
Executes on/off control.Executes constant speed rotation control.
Issues ‘E010’.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)2-6
2. OperationsThe main motor (M1) is a DC motor with a built-in clock pulse generator, which generates
clock pulses (MMCLK) in relation to the rotation of the motor while the motor is rotating.The speed control circuit controls the main motor (M1) so that it rotates at a specific speed by
matching the frequency of these clock pulses and that of the reference signals.When the main motor drive signal (MMD) from the DC controller circuit goes ‘1’, the motor
diver drive circuit turns on, causing the main motor (M1) to rotate at a specific speed.While the main motor is rotating at a specific speed, the main motor driver PCB keeps sending
the constant speed state signal (MLOCK=0) to the DC controller PCB. If the rotation of the motorstarts to have fluctuations, the MLOCK signal goes ‘1’.
Related Error Code
E010While the main motor drive signal is generated, the rotation of the main motor deviates froma specific number for 1 sec or more.
a. Turning On/Off the Main MotorWhen the main motor drive signal (MMD) from the DC controller circuit goes ‘1’, the main motordriver turns on to rotate the main motor (M1).
b. Rotating the Main Motor at a Constant SpeedThe drive circuit on the motor driver PCB controls the main motor so that the phase of the fre-quency of the clock pulse signals (MMCLK) occurring when the motor rotates and that of thefrequency of the reference signals match. The main motor driver PCB sends the constant speedstate signal (MLOCK=0) to the DC controller circuit.
c. Detecting an Error (E010)If the rotation of the main motor starts to have fluctuations for some reason, the MLOCK signalgoes ‘1’. If the signal remains ‘1’ for about 1 sec, the DC controller will find the condition to be afault in the main motor, and will stop the main motor and, at the same time, indicate ‘E010’ in thedisplay.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-7
E. Inputs to and Outputs from the DC Controller
1. Inputs to the DC Control (1/2)
Figure 2-105
PS1
PS2
PS3
TH1
TH2
J101-1-3-2
J109-11-10
-9
J102-7-9-8
J132-3-5-4
J108-4-3-5
J102-1
-6
J131-1
-2
SCHP
LHP
DPDDIG3
PDP
+5V
+5V
+5V
RPD
+5V
TH1
TH2
DC controller PCB
When the scanner is in the home position, ‘1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS1, ‘1’.)
When the lens is in the home position, ‘1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS2, ‘1’.)
When PS3 has detected paper, ‘0’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS3, ‘1’.)
When PS4 has detected paper, ‘1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS4, ‘1’.)
When Q751 has detected paper, ‘1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS751, ‘0’.)
When the surface temperature of the fixing heater increases, the voltage decreases. (analog signal)
When the temperature of the scanner increases,the voltage decreases. (analog signal)
Scanner homeposition sensor
Lens homeposition sensor
Delivery sensor
Vertical path rollerpaper sensor
Pre-registrationroller paper sensor
Fixing thermistor
Scanner thermistor
PS4
J113-1-3-2
SFPDDIG2
When PS5 has detected paper, ‘0’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS5, ‘1’.)
Single-feederpaper sensor(Single-feeder type only)
PS5
J62
J62J433
Q751
Sensor PCB
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)2-8
2. Inputs to the DC Controller (2/2)
Figure 2-106
When the light reflected by the original increases, the voltage increases.
J107-4-3-2-1
+24V
The variation in the resistance of the fixing heater is corrected in three levels based on combinations of 2-bit signals.
The keys and the LEDs are wired in a matrix in the control panel PCB, and the DC controller turns on or flashes the LEDs and reads key inputs.
AEAEREF
J111J301
DC controller PCB
DIG1HEAT0DIG1HEAT1
J102-2-3-4-5
J62
AE sensor PCB
Control panel PCB
J601
+24V
J111-15
J111-16
PWOFF
SW309
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-9
3. Outputs from the DC Controller (1/2)
Figure 2-107
J201-2
-1
DC controller PCBComposite power supply PCB
Noise filter
+24V
HVT board
High-voltagecircuitblock
Micro-processor
DS1
Door switch
Transformer
Line filter
(220/240V model only)
M2
Scanner/lens drive motor
M1
Mainmotor
Main motordriver PCB
NF1LF1
J207-1
-2 J104-2
FU1
Fixing heater
H1
J434J16
Fixing heateractivation circuit
J910-3
-1
J103-6J104-1
Scanning lamp
LA1Scanning lampactivation circuit
FU2
Thermal fuse 1
Thermal fuse 2
HEAT_TRG
Communication withthe composite powersupply
MMDMLOCK
See p. 3-7.
When ‘0’,the fixing heaterturns on.
See p. 2-5.
Primary charging rollerDeveloping cylinderTransfer charging rollerStatic eliminator
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)2-10
4. Outputs from the DC Control PCB (2/2)
Figure 2-108
J109-8
-7
J132-2
-1
J130-1
-2
J109-4
-3
J109-6
-5
J109-2
-1
Pickup clutch solenoid
Registration clutch solenoid
Multifeeder pickup solenoid(Multifeeder type only)
Lens solenoid
SL4
SL3
SL2
SL1
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
PUSLD*
RGSLD*
LNSLD*
MFSLD*
When ‘0’, the pickup clutch solenoidturns on.
When ‘0’, the registration clutchsolenoid turns on.
When ‘0’, the lens solenoid turns on.
When ‘0’, the multifeeder pickupsolenoid turns on.
J106-1
-2Side blanking lamp (front)
Side blanking lamp (rear)SB_LP*
+24V
When ‘0’, the blanking lamp turns on.
DC controller PCB
J51
J51
J54
J52
J53
J55
Cassette pickup solenoid SL5
+24V
CPUSD*
When ‘0’, the cassette pickup solenoidturns on.
J58
Scanner cooling fan
+24V
FM1D*
When ‘0’, the scanner cooling fanturns on.FM1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-11
5. Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF
Figure 2-109
Composite power supply PCB
+24V
+5V
+5V
+24V
J114-1
-2REQ
-3
-4ACK
-5
-6TXD
-7
-8
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1RXD
DC controller PCB
See Chapter 8.To the ADF
-4
-3
-2
-1To the ADF
J60
J105-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
J202-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
J24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3
EXPOSURE SYSTEM
This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the machine's lens driveunit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timing at which these drive units areoperated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assmbled and adjusted.
I. OPERATIONS ..............................3-1A. Outline ...................................3-1B. Varying the Reproduction
Ratio ......................................3-2C. Lens Drive System ................3-3D. Scanner Drive System ..........3-4
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM .................3-9
A. Controlling the ScanningLamp .....................................3-9
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 3-12A. Scanner Drive Assembly .... 3-13B. Lens Drive Assembly ......... 3-31C. Exposure System ............... 3-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-1
ItemLamp
Scanning
Scanner position detection
Ratio variation
Lens drive control
Scanner drive control
Protective function
DescriptionHalogen
By moving the No. 1 mirror mount
By a sensor (scanner home position sensor; PS1)
Main scanning direction:by varying the optical lengthSub scanning direction:by varying the speed of the No. 1 mirror mount
Scanner/lens drive motor (M2)Fixed focal point lens unitMobile No. 4/5 mirror unit
Scanner/lens drive motor (M2)Scanner thermistor (TH2)
By a fuse (blows in response to overheating of the scanning lamp to cutpower to the lamp)• Thermal fuse (FU1; blows at 128°C)
Table 3-101
Figure 3-101
Photosensitivedrum
Fixed focal point lens
Enlarge Reduce Moves for enlargement/reduction
No. 4/5 mirror unit
Copyboard glass
I. OPERATIONS
A. Outline
Table 3-101 shows the major functions of the exposure system.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-2
Figure 3-102
Direct
Optical length
Reduction
Optical length
Enlargement
Optical length
Optical length: L1 < L2, L1 < L3
L3
L2
L1
F
F
F
F'
F'
F'
B. Varying the Reproduction Ratio
The reproduction ratio in the drum axial direction (main scanning direction) is varied by thelens drive system, and that in the drum peripheral direction (sub scanning direction) is changed bythe scanner drive system.
In the lens drive system, the positions of the fixed focal point lens and the No. 4/5 mirror arechanged to vary the reproduction ratio.
In the scanner system, the relative speed of the No. 1 mirror mount is made higher (for reduc-tion) or lower (for enlargement) than the drum peripheral speed.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-3
Figure 3-103
Lens home positionsensor (PS2)
Lens shift detecting shaftfor side blanking lamp
Lens unit
Reduction
Scanner/lens drive motor(M2)
No. 4/5 mirror unit
Top View
Switching gear
While the lens is moving
Lens
hom
e po
sitio
n de
tect
ion
sign
al(L
HP
)
Lens
sol
enoi
d dr
ive
sign
al(L
NS
LD*)
SL3
DC controller PCB
SL3 SL3ON OFF
Switchinggear
Switchinggear
Enlargement
Cam
Lens cable
While the scanner is moving
C. Lens Drive System
1. OutlineThe lens drive system is driven by the scanner/lens drive motor (M2). When the lens solenoid
(SL3) turns on, the switching gear is pushed in the direction of . In this condition, when thescanner/lens drive motor rotates in reverse direction (), the lens unit will move in the direction ofreduction ( ) by the work of the gear and the lens cable.
At the same time, the No. 4/5 mirror unit operates according to the distance over which the lensunit is moved by the work of the gear and the cam, thereby varying the optical length.
At this time, the blanking lamp also moves in conjunction with the lens to blank out the appro-priate front/rear widths to suit the selected reduction ratio.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-4
Figure 3-104
J101
-1
M2
PS1 Light-blockingplate
Scanner home position signal (SCHP)
Scanner home position sensor (PS1)
J110
-1S
C_C
OM
-2S
C_B
*
-3
SC
_B-4
SC
_CO
M-5
SC
_A*
-6S
C_A
Q109
Motor driver circuit
DC controller PCB
D. Scanner Drive System
1. OutlineThe scanner is driven by the scanner/lens drive motor (M2), whose direction of rotation
changes to move the scanner forward or in reverse.When moving the scanner forward, the speed of rotation of the motor varies according to the
selected reproduction ratio on a continuous basis; when moving the scanner in reverse, on the otherhand, its speed remains the same regardless of the selected reproduction ratio in normal copying(312mm/sec, about 3.3 as fast as when moving the scanner forward in Direct).
The distance over which the scanner is moved varies according to the length of copy paper andthe selected reproduction ratio.
The scanner/lens drive motor dives the lens drive system as well as the scanner.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-5
Description
• Provides a means of reference fordetermining forward movementdistance.
• Stops the scanner moving in re-verse in 0.1 sec.
Scanner sensor
PS1(scannerhome positionsensor)
Signal
SCHP
ScannerForward Reverse
Table 3-102
Figure 3-105
Copy Start keyPower switchONON
STBY INTR SCFW
Forward
SCFWSCRV LSTR STBY
Scanner home positionsensor (PS1)
Scanning lamp(LA1)
Scanner I II
SCRV
I Reverse
Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor (Q751)
I : Scanner home position detectionII : Lens home position detection
2. Relationship between Scanner Sensor and Signal
3. Basic Sequence of Operations (scanner)
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB controls the forward movement distance of thescanner with reference to the falling edge of the scanner home position signal. The forward move-ment distance of the scanner varies according to the length of copy paper and reproduction ratio. Ifthe ratio is less than 130%, the scanner is moved forward as if for A4 (297 mm); if it is 130% ormore, the scanner is moved forward as if for LTR (279 mm).
For descriptions on how length is detected, see p. 5-10.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-6
Figure 3-106
Switching to 6-cpm copying speed
SCRV SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY
Check timing by thermistor(TH2)
Main motor (M1)
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
Scanner
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
II
I
37.5˚C or higher 34.5˚C or higher
I : When the pre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751) is off, the pickup clutch solenoid isturned off to prevent overheating of the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1).
II : By the time the Copy Start key is pressed or the power switch is turned off and then on againnext time, the scanner is moved to and stopped at 105 mm forward from the home position.
4. Controlling the Copying SpeedThe machine uses a halogen lamp for scanning, and the heat of the lamp increases the tempera-
ture of the copyboard.To prevent possible overheating of the copyboard glass, the temperature of the scanner is
monitored by a thermistor (TH2); if its reading reaches 37.5°C or higher, the copying speed isreduced to 6 cpm.
If this mechanism turns on during continuous copying, it remains on until the end of the copy-ing job.
At the end of copying, if the reading of the thermistor is 34.5°C or higher, the No. 1 mirrormount is moved forward 105 mm from the home position and stopped, thereby lowering the tem-perature of the copyboard fast.
Reference:While the copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm, the speed of the reverse movement of thescanner is reduced to prevent overheating of the copyboard glass. (about 75 mm/sec)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-7
Current switching signal 1
Current switching signal 2
Current switching signal 3
(Q101)
(Q109)
DC controller PCB
A
A*
B
B*
SC-COM
SC-COM
J110
SC-A
SC-A*
SC-B
SC-B* M2
Motordrivercircuit
+24VU
R399
Mic
ropr
oces
sor
5. Controlling the Scanner/Lens Drive Motora. Outline
The scanner/lens drive motor (M2) is a 4-phase stepping motor. The timing at which the drivepower (SC-COM) and pulses (SC-A, SCA*, SC-B, SC-B*) are generated is controlled to turn on/off the scanner/lens drive motor (M2) or to switch the direction of its rotation.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-8
b. OperationsThe microprocessor (Q101) mounted on the DC controller PCB receives instructions from the
control panel PCB copying mode settings (e.g., reproduction ratio). In response, it applies drivepulses to the scanner/lens drive motor (M2) through the motor driver circuit.
The scanner motor is a 4-phase stepping motor, and changes the direction and speed of itsrotation according to the sequence and frequency of drive pulses (SC-A*through SC-B*).
The motor drive voltage is switched on and off by pulse signals (A through B*) generated bythe microprocessor (Q101). Any of these pulse signals is generated when the motor is in operation,while no pulse signal is generated when the motor is at rest.
The current switching signals from 1 to 3 generated by the microprocessor (Q101) are used tocontrol the current flowing to the motor so that it varies according to the state of the scanner and thelens.
c. Detecting Overcurrent for the Scanner/Lens Drive MotorIf overcurrent flows to the scanner/lens drive motor for some reason, the fuse (R339) on the DC
controller PCB will blow to cut the power to the motor.
Caution:The fuse (R339) will not recover once it has blown.
Forwarding thescanner
1
1
1
Current switching signal 1
Current switching signal 2
Current switching signal 3
Starting the lens
0
0
0
Moving the lens
0
0
1
Reversing thescanner
0
1
1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-9
Figure 3-201
(Q101)
Serialcommunication
VR107
DC controller PCB
Mic
ropr
oces
sor
(Q900)Intensity adjustmentsignal
PWM_1KHz
Lamp activationsignal
LAMP_ON
Activation detectionsignal
LAMP_DETECT
Composite power supply PCB
9
4
2
7
(HIC001)
Phasecontrolcircuit
Arcing circuit
Scanning lamp(LA1)
Thermal fuse(FU1)
Activation detection circuit
Rectifyingcircuit
Mic
ropr
oces
sor
Rectifyingcircuit
+-
+-
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM
A. Controlling the Scanning Lamp
1. OutlineFigure 3-201 shows the circuit used to control the scanning lamp, and has the following func-
tions:• Turning on/off the scanning lamp.• Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp.• Monitoring the state (on/off) of the scanning lamp.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-10
2. Operationsa. Turning On/Off the Scanning Lamp
The DC controller PCB and the composite power supply exchange signals in serial communi-cation to control the scanning lamp. According to the scanner lamp active voltage signal, the mi-croprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB controls the intensity adjustment signal(PWM_1KHz) and the lamp activation signal (LAMP_ON) to turn on/off the scanning lamp(LA1).When LAMP_ON is ‘0’,
The phase control circuit turns on.The arcing circuit turns on.
The scanning lamp turns on.
When LAMP_ON is ‘1’,The phase control circuit turns off.
The arcing circuit turns off.The scanning lamp turns off.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-11
Figure 3-202
c. Monitoring the Activation of the Scanning LampThe activation detection signal (LAMP_DETECT) is sent to the microprocessor (Q900) on the
composite power supply PCB as long as the scanning lamp remains on.The composite power supply PCB sends the lamp activation signal to the DC controller PCB in
serial by way of monitoring the activation of the scanning lamp (LA1).
Related Error Code
E220• The lamp activation detection signal is not detected for 1 sec or more although the scan-
ning lamp activation signal has been sent.• The lamp activation detection signal has been detected for 1 sec or more although the
scanning lamp activation signal is not sent.
If an error has been detected, the power switch will be turned off after indicating an error codefor 2 sec.
t [msec]
ON
OFF
1kHz1
[msec]
Pulse duty= t/ × 100 [%]
<PWM_1KHz signal>
1k1
b. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning LampThe intensity of the lamp is controlled by the scanning lamp active voltage signal sent by the
DC controller PCB in serial.The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB sends the intensity adjust-
ment signal (PWM_1KHz) in response to the scanning lamp active voltage signal. In turn, thephase control circuit (HIC 001) controls the voltage supplied to the scanning lamp.
The PWM_1KHz signal varies according to the setting of VR107 mounted on the DC control-ler PCB between 10% and 90% in terms of pulse duty ratio or between 50.5 and 80 V for the 120 Vmodel (between 85.7 and 145.8 V for the 220/240 V model) in terms of actual voltage by way ofphase control.
However, the intensity remains a specific value for AE exposure so that it is 56 V for the 120 Vmodel (108.5 V for the 220/240 V model) in terms of actual voltage.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-12
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and
Varistors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)5. As necessary, cut the harness band.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-13
Figure 3-301
Figure 3-302
[1] [1]
[2]
[3]
A. Scanner Drive Assembly
1. Removing the Scanner/Lens DriveMotor
1) Remove the front lower cover.(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing theFront Lower Cover.”)
2) Remove the copyboard glass.(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing theCopyboard Glass.”)
3) Remove the four screws [1], and detachthe lens cover [2].
4) Disconnect the connector (J110) [3] fromthe DC controller PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-14
Figure 3-303
Figure 3-304
[4]
[4] [5]
5) Open the machine’s top unit farther, andhold it in position using the handle (about30 mm in diameter) of a screwdriver.
6) Remove the machine’s two fixing screws[4] from the scanner/lens drive motor [5].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-15
Figure 3-305
[6]
[7][5]
Lift.
7) Free the top unit (by removing the screw-driver), and close the top unit.
8) Remove the E-ring [6]; then, lift the cabledrive pulley [7] slightly, and detach thescanner/lens drive motor [5].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-16
Figure 3-306
Wind 1.5 times. (black cable)Wind 7.5 times.(silver-colored cable)
2. Outline of the Scanner Drive Cable
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-17
Figure 3-307
Figure 3-308
[1]
3. Routing the Scanner Drive Cablea. Before Starting the Work
Prepare the following:• Mirror positioning tool• Cable clip• Adhesive tape
1) Set the mirror positioning tool as shown.
2) Prepare about five strips of adhesive tape(each one about 20 × 50 mm).
3) Remove the copyboard glass.(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing theCopyboard Glass.”)
4) Disconnect the connectors (J101, J131)[1] from the DC controller PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-18
Figure 3-309
Figure 3-310
[2][2] [4]
[2] [2]
[3]
[3]
[5]
[4][5]
5) If the machine is equipped with an ADF,free the hook [2], and disconnect the tworelay connectors [3] from the left upperstay [4].
6) Remove the three screws [5], and detachthe left upper stay [4].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-19
Figure 3-311
[6] [6]
[7]
7) Remove the four screws [6], and detachthe lens cover [7].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-20
Figure 3-313
Figure 3-312
[2]Shorter end
Longer end
[1]
Face with a marking
[1]
[3]
Top View
[3]
b. Routing the Reversing Cable1) Wind the reversing cables (silver-colored)
[2] on the cable drive pulley [1] 7.5 timeswith the longer end on top; then, secure itin position with a cable clip [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-21
Figure 3-314
Figure 3-315
[5]
Hook
(front)
[1]
[4]
[7]
[6]
2) Put the cable drive pulley [1] into the shaft[4], and secure it in position with an E-ring [5].When putting the cable drive pulley intothe shaft, be sure that the hook is at thefront.
3) Hook the shorter end [6] on the pulley [7].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-22
Figure 3-317
Figure 3-316
[10]
[11]
[6]
[8]
[9]
Figure 3-318
[6]
[12][13]
[14]
[15]
4) Lead the shorter end [6] under the No. 1mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirrormount [9]; then, hook it on the left rearpulley [10] and the pulley [11] of the No.2/3 mirror mount.
5) After fitting the shorter end [6] on thecable hook [12], secure its end with adhe-sive tape [13].Be sure that the secured end of the cable isfound where the hole in the left side plateand the tip of the cable matches.
6) Lead the longer end [14] along the cabledrive pulley, and hook it on the pulley[15] on the right front side.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-23
Figure 3-319
Figure 3-320
[8]
[17]
[9]
[16][14]
[18] [19]
[14]
7) Lead the longer end [14] under the No. 1mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirrormount [9]; then, hook it on the pulley [16]on the left front side and the pulley [17] ofthe No. 2/3 mirror mount.
8) Hook the longer end [14] on the cablehook [18]; then, secure its end to the leftside with adhesive tape [19].Be sure that the secured end of the cable isfound where the hole in the left side plateand the tip of the cable matches.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-24
Figure 3-322
Figure 3-321
Figure 3-323
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Face without a marking
[5][1]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[9]
c. Routing the Forwarding Cable1) Fit the longer end forwarding cable
(black) [2] on the top hook of the cabledrive pulley [1], and wind it 1.5 times.Then, secure the shorter end [3] as shownwith adhesive tape [4].
2) Lead the longer end [5] along the cabledrive pulley [1] as shown, and hook it onthe pulley [6] on the right front side.
3) Lead the longer end [5] under the No. 1mirror mount [7]; then, hook it on the pul-ley [8] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount, andlead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7]and the scanning lamp [9].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-25
Figure 3-324
Figure 3-326
Figure 3-325
[5]
[10]
[11]
[3]
[7]
[9]
[3]
[12]
4) Hook the end of the longer end [5] on thehole [10] on the right side.
5) Free the shorter end [3], and hook it on thepulley [11] on the right rear side.
6) Lead the shorter end [3] under the No. 1mirror mount [7], and hook it on the pul-ley [12] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount asshown; then, lead it between the No. 1mirror mount [7] and the scanning lamp[9].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-26
Figure 3-327
Figure 3-328
[3] [13]
[14][3]
[15]
[5]
7) Hook the end of the shorter end [3] on thehole [13] on the right side.
8) Free the shorter end [3] and the longer end[5] (reversing cable), and connect bothwith a spring [14]; then, fit the stopper[15].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-27
Figure 3-329
[1] [16]
9) Detach the pulley clip [16] from the cabledrive pulley [1].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-28
Figure 3-330 (rear)
Figure 3-331 (front)
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
d. Positioning the No. 1 Mirror Mount1) Fix the rear and the front of the No. 1 mir-
ror mount [1] temporarily to the metal fix-ing [2] of the forwarding cable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-29
Figure 3-332 (rear)
Figure 3-333 (front)
[4][3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
2) Turn the cable drive pulley [4] so that thethree shafts [3] of the mirror positioningtool for rear and front is as shown.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-30
Figure 3-334 (rear)
Figure 3-335 (front)
[1]
[1]
3) While keeping the condition of step 2),tighten the positioning screw on the rearand front of the No. 1 mirror mount [1].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-31
Figure 3-336
[1] [1]
[2]
B. Lens Drive Assembly
1. Removing the Lens Cable1) Turn on the power; when the lens has
moved to the Direct position, disconnectthe power plug.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing theCopyboard Glass.”)
3) Remove the main drive assembly.(See Chapter 7.III.D.2.“Removing theMain Drive Assembly.”)
4) Remove the four screws [1], and detachthe lens cover [2].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-32
Figure 3-337
Figure 3-338
[3]
Marking
[4]
[5][6]
5) Mark the position of the lens cable fixingplate [3] and the lens mount [4] with ascriber.
Caution:When routing the lens cable, be sure torefer to the marking made with a scriber.
6) Disengage the lever [5] of the No. 4/5 mir-ror mount and the gear [6].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-33
Figure 3-341
Figure 3-339
Figure 3-340
[7]
[8]
[6]
[9]
[10]
7) Remove the screw [7], and detach the camgear [6] and the cable retainer [8].
8) Holding the middle of the No. 1 mirrormount [9], move it to the center of themachine.
Caution:Do not hold the reflecting plate.
9) Remove the spring [10].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-34
Figure 3-342
Figure 3-343
[11]
[12]
[13]
[12]
10) Remove the screw [11], and detach thelens cable fixing plate [12].
11) Free the lens cable [13] from the lenscable fixing plate [12]; then, detach thelens cable from the machine.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-35
Figure 3-344
Figure 3-345
[2][1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
2. Routing the Lens Cable1) After routing the lens cable, keep the lever
[1] of the No. 4/5 mirror mount disen-gaged from the cam gear [2] (so that thelever will not come into contact when thecam gear rotates).
2) While keeping the condition in step 1),turn on the power; when the No. 1 mirrormount and the lens stopped moving, turnoff the power.• The lens will move to the Direct posi-
tion.3) Check to make sure that the tip of the le-
ver [1] of the No. 4/5 mirror mount andthe marking [3] on the top face of the camgear [2] match; then, engage the lever [1]and the cam gear [2].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-36
Figure 3-346
[4]
[2]
[1]
4) If the tip of the lever [1] and the markingon the cam gear [2] do not match, removethe fixing screw [4] of the cam gear [2]and detach the cam gear; then, mount thecam gear once again so that the markingon it and the tip of the lever match.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-37
Figure 3-347
Figure 3-348
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4][5]
C. Exposure System
1. Removing the Scanning Lamp1) Disconnect the power plug.2) Remove the copyboard glass.
(See Chapter 7.III.C.1. “Removing theCopyboard Glass.”)
3) Holding the middle of the No. 1 mirrormount [1], move the No. 1 mirror mount[1] to the right by about 5 cm.
Cauiton:Do not hold the reflecting plate.
4) Free the harness [3] from the guide [2];then, remove the screw [4], and detach thereflecting plate [5].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-38
Figure 3-349
[7]
[6]5) While pushing the electrode mount [6]
found at the rear of the machine in the di-rection of the arrow, detach the scanninglamp [7].
Caution:1. Do not start the work if the scanning
lamp is hot.2. Do not leave fingerprints on the sur-
face of the scanning lamp.3. If the surface of the scanning lamp is
soiled, dry wipe it.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-39
Figure 3-350
Logo mark
Scanning lamp
45 (approx.)
(mirror mount moving in reverse)
(front)
2. Points to Note When Mounting theLamp
When mounting the scanning lamp, besure that the logo mark (or the name of themanufacturer) is toward the front. Further, besure that the protrusion near the middle of thelamp is as shown.
Caution:• Do not touch the lamp portion.• If you have replaced the scanning lamp,
be sure to perform intensity adjustment (p.11-42) and AE adjustment (p. 11-43).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)3-40
Figure 3-351
Figure 3-352
[1]
[2]
(front)
Thermal fuse
Reflecting plate
3. Removing the Thermal Fuse1) Disconnect the power plug.2) Remove the copyboard glass.
(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing theCopyboard Glass.”)
3) Remove the two screws [1], and detachthe thermal fuse [2].
4. Points to Note When Mounting theFuse
When mounting the thermal fuse, be surethat the thermal fuse is oriented as shown.
Make sure that the fuse is in contact withthe reflecting plate.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-41
5. Removing the Thermistor Unit1) Remove the top cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.1. “Removing theTop Cover.”)
2) Disconnect the connector (J131) [1] fromthe DC controller PCB; remove the screw[2], and detach the thermistor unit [3].
Figure 3-353
[1]
[2][3]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
This chapter discusses the principles of how images are formed. It also explains thetiming at which the various units involved in image formation are operated, and showshow they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
I. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ...4-1A. Outline ...................................4-1B. Timing Chart for the Image
Formation System .................4-3C. Controlling the Primary
Charging Roller Bias .............4-4D. Controlling the Transfer
Roller Bias .............................4-8E. Controlling the Developing/
Separation Static EliminatorBias .................................... 4-11
F. Measuring the Density ofOriginals ............................. 4-16
G. Controlling the Side BlankingMechanism ......................... 4-21
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 4-22A. Cartridge ............................ 4-23B. Transfer Charging
Assembly ............................ 4-25C. Blank Exposure .................. 4-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-1
ItemControlling the primary chargingroller bias
Transfer roller bias control
Developing/separation staticeliminator bias control
Density control
Blanking control
DescriptionAC constant current control, on/off controlDC constant voltage control, on/off controlDC voltage level control
DC constant voltage control, on/off controlDC constant current control (ATVC, cleaning bias)Voltage level controlPolarity switching
DC constant voltage control, on/off controlAC constant voltage control, on/off controlDC voltage level control
Developing DC bias control
Side blanking lamp
Table 4-101
I. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
A. Outline
The major functions of the image formation system are as follows:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-2
Figure 4-101
Side blanking lamp
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
AE sensor
Developing cylinder
Transfer roller
High-voltage circuit block
Lamp regulator block
Q900Microprocessor
Q101Microprocessor
DC controller PCBComposite power supply PCB
Drum cartridge
Photo-sensitive
drum
Lens
Primary charging roller
Static eliminator
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-3
Figure 4-102
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW
forward
SCFWSCRV
Reverse
-625V
3200V
-400V 0.5sec.(approx.)
LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Primary AC bias
Transfer bias
Transfer cleaning biasTransfer referencebias (ATVC)
Static eliminator biasPre-registration rollerpaper sensor (Q751)
Primary DC bias
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Scanner
SCRV
-500V
0.6sec.(approx.)
0.6sec.(approx.)
B. Timing Chart for the Image Formation System
Basic Sequence of Operations (Direct, 2 copies, continuous)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-4
C. Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias
1. OutlineThe circuit shown in Figure 4-103 is used to control the voltage applied to the primary charging
roller, and has the following functions:• Turning on and off the DC/AC bias• Controlling the DC bias to a specific voltage• Controlling the AC bias to a specific voltage• Switching the level of the DC biasBoth DC bias and AC bias are applied to the primary charging roller so as to ensure that the
surface potential of the photosensitive drum will be uniform. The level of the DC bias is switchedbetween when forming copy images and when not forming copy images.
Reference:DC component: -400 V (non-image area)/-625 V (image area)AC component: 2000 Vpp to 3000 Vpp (885µA)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-5
Figure 4-103
Main transformer
T101
PR
_DC
_ON
J103
-4J2
03 -5
PD
C_P
WM
DC
bia
s co
ntro
l sig
nal
PD
C_S
DC
vol
tage
mon
itor
sign
al
PA
C_S
AC
com
pone
nt c
urre
nt m
onito
r si
gnal
PA
C_O
UT
AC
bia
s ou
tput
sig
nal
Amplifier
Voltageseparation
circuit
Photosensitive drum
Primary charging roller
T508
Microprocessor (Q900)
Microprocessor (Q101)
DC controller PCB
Composite power supply PCB
Serial communication
High-voltage transformer for primary charging
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-6
DC bias ON signal(8-bit signal communication)
bit0 bit11 –
1 0
0 0
PR_DC_ON(J103-4)
0
1
1
DC bias ON (image area)DC bias ON (non-image area)DC bias OFF
Table 4-102 Relationship between DC Bias Output and Signal
b. Turning On and Off the AC BiasThe AC bias applied to the primary charging roller is turned on and off by the serial communi-
cation signal from the DC controller PCB.When the AC bias ON signal arrives from the DC controller PCB, the microprocessor (Q900)
on the composite power supply PCB generates the AC bias output signal (PAC_OUT), therebyapplying an AC bias to the primary charging roller.
c. Controlling the DC/AC Bias to a Specific Voltage/CurrentThe DC bias and the AC bias applied to the primary charging roller are controlled by the
microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB so that they remain a specific level.When a DC/AC bias is generated, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply
PCB detects the DC voltage monitor signal (PDC_S) and the AC component current monitor signal(PAC_S), compares their levels against the reference levels, and varies the DC bias control signal(PDC_PWM) and the AC bias output signal (PAC_OUT) according to the differences so as toensure that they remain specific levels.
Reference:The DC bias control signal varies its pulse duty ratio while the AC bias output signal varies itsamplitude to change the level of the DC/AC bias.
2. Operationsa. Turning On and Off the DC Bias
The DC bias applied to the primary charging roller is turned on or off by the serial communica-tion signal and the primary charging bias ON signal (PR_DC_ON) from the DC controller PCB.
When the Copy Start key is pressed, the DC bias ON signal (serial) and the primary chargingbias ON signal (PR_DC_ON) are sent. The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supplyPCB generates the DC bias control signal (PDC_PWM) based on the combination of the serialsignal and the PR_DC_ON signal, applying a DC bias to the primary charging roller.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-7
Figure 4-104
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW SCFWSCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Primary AC bias
Primary DC bias -400V -625V
SCRV
d. Switching the DC Bias LevelThe machine switches the DC bias level between the copy image area (-625 V) and the non-
copy image area (-400 V).The level of the DC bias is switched by the DC bias ON signal (serial signal) generated by the
DC controller PCB.The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB varies the DC bias control
signal (PDC_PWM) to switch the level of the DC bias. (See Table 4-102.)
Reference:The machine applies a DC bias over a non-copy image area (between sheets) so as to preventcharging the photosensitive drum to a positive potential otherwise caused by the cleaning biasfrom the transfer roller.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-8
Figure 4-105
Main transformer Transfer positive DC
bias generation circuit
Transfer positive DC bias ON signalT_REV_ON*
T101
Transfer current detection signalT_FW_S
Photo-sensitive
drum
Transfer charging roller
Transfer DC bias control signal T_FW_DRV
Transfer bias voltage detection signal
Transfer DC bias ON signalT_FW_ON
High-voltage transformer control signal CLK32K
Transfer overcurrent detection signalHV_LIMIT
+24V T302Transfer high-voltage transformer
Serial communi-cation
(Q101) (Q900)
Mic
ropr
oces
sor
Mic
ropr
oces
sor
DC controller PCB Composite power supply PCB
Transfer bias detection circuit
Transfer bias control circuit
T_FEEDBACK
D. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias
1. OutlineThe circuit shown in Figure 4-105 is used to control the voltage applied to the transfer charging
roller, and has the following functions:• Turning on and off the transfer bias.• Controlling the transfer bias to a constant voltage.• Correcting the transfer bias voltage level (ATVC)• Switching the transfer bias polarity (cleaning bias)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-9
T_REV_ON* signal
10
11
Negative transfer bias ONPositive transfer bias ON (cleaning bias)Transfer bias OFFATVC
Transfer bias ON signal (serial communication)
bit2 bit31 01 1
0 00 1
T-FW_ON signal
11
01
2. Operationsa. Turning On and Off the Transfer Bias
The transfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller is turned on and off by the serial com-munication signal from the DC controller PCB.
When the transfer bias ON signal (serial signal) is generated by the DC controller PCB, themicroprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB generates the high-voltage trans-former control signal (CLK32K), transfer DC bias ON signal (T_FW_ON), and transfer DC biascontrol signal (T_FW_DRV), thereby applying the transfer bias to the transfer charging roller.
Table 4-103 Relationship between Transfer Bias Output and Signals
b. Controlling the Transfer Bias to a Specific VoltageThe transfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller is controlled to a specific level by the
microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB.When a transfer bias is generated, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply
PCB checks the transfer bias voltage detection signal (T_FEEDBACK), compares it against thereference value, and varies the transfer DC bias control signal (T_FW_DRV) according to thedifference to ensure that the transfer bias remains a specific level at all times.
Reference:The level of transfer bias applied to the transfer roller during a copying run is between -7.5and -3.0 kV.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-10
STBY INTR SCFW SCFWSCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Reference bias (ATVC)
Transfer bias
SCRV
0.7sec (approx.)
0.8sec (approx.)
Copy Start keyON
1.2sec (approx.)Cleaning bias
1.6sec(approx.)
Figure 4-106
c. Correcting the Transfer Bias Voltage Level (ATVC control)The machine automatically corrects the application voltage level of the transfer bias to correct
the changes in the transfer efficiency caused by the deterioration of the transfer roller or thechanges in the environment.
A current of a specific level (-14.6 µA) is applied to the transfer charging roller during initialrotation executed each time the Copy Start key is pressed. The microprocessor (Q900) on the com-posite power supply PCB checks the transfer current detection signal (T_FW_S), and varies thetransfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller so that it will be an appropriate level.
Reference:While the transfer charging roller makes a single rotation, the microprocessor (Q900) checksthe transfer current detection signal four times, and determines the level of the transfer bias toapply using the average of the readings.
d. Switching the Polarity of the Transfer Bias (cleaning bias)The machine uses a direct charging method, allowing toner to move from the photosensitive
drum to the transfer roller as when a jam occurs if left unattended.To remove excess toner, a positive voltage is applied to the transfer roller as follows, thereby
returning the toner from the roller to the drum:< Timing >• While initial rotation is executed after the Copy Start key is pressed• Part of the period in which the scanner is moved in reverse• Part of the period in which last rotation is executed
The polarity of the transfer bias is switched by the transfer bias ON signal (serial signal) gener-ated by the DC controller PCB.
In response to the signal, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCBcauses the transfer positive DC bias On signal (T_REV_ON*) to go ‘0’, so that the positive compo-nent of the transfer bias (constant current control, + 1.56µA/2.5 kV max.) will be applied to thetransfer roller. (See Table 4-103.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-11
E. Controlling the Developing/Separation Static Eliminator Bias
1. OutlineThe circuit shown in Figure 4-107 is used to control the voltage applied to the developing
assembly and the separation static eliminator, and has the following functions:• Turning on and off the developing DC bias• Turning on and off the AC bias (turning on and off the static eliminator bias)• Controlling the voltage level of the developing DC bias
Both AC bias and DC bias are applied to the developing cylinder while copies are being made.When the photosensitive drum rotates and yet developing is not under way, about -500 VDC isapplied to the developing cylinder regardless of the position of the density adjusting lever, therebypreventing adhesion of excess toner on the photosensitive drum.
Reference :Developing DC bias : -80 ~ -550VDeveloping AC bias : 1200Vpp ± 10%
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-12
Figure 4-107
Main transformer
T101T201
+5V
Photosensitive
drum Developing cylinder
Static eliminator
Static eliminator
bias generation circuit
Developing DC bias detection
circuit
+
DC
bia
s co
ntro
l sig
nal
BIA
S_P
WM
DC
bia
s m
onito
r si
gnal
BIA
S_S
AC
bia
s os
cilla
tion
sign
alA
CB
IAS
Microprocessor (Q900)
Microprocessor (Q101)
Composite power supply PCB
Serial communication
AE sensor PCB
Control panel
DC controller PCB
Density correction
switch (SW101)
J103 -3
J203 -6
-2-7
DV
_DC
_ON
DV
_AC
_ON
AE
sig
nal
Cop
y de
nsity
se
tting
sig
nal
Cop
y de
nsity
co
rrec
tion
sign
al
High-voltage transformer for developing/static eliminator
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-13
DC bias ONDC bias ON(- 500V)DC bias OFF
Developing DCON signal(Serial communication)
bit5 bit6– 10 1
0 0
DV_DC_ON(J103-3)
01
1
2. Turning On and Off the DC BiasThe DC bias applied to the developing cylinder is turned on and off by the signal communica-
tion signal and the developing DC bias ON signal (DV_DC_ON) generated by the DC controllerPCB.
When the developing DCON signal (serial signal) and the developing DC bias ON sign(DV_DC_ON) are generated by the DC controller PCB, the microprocessor (Q900) on the com-posite power supply PCB sends the DC bias control signal (BIAS_PWM), thereby applying a DCbias to the developing cylinder.
Table 4-104 Relationship between Developing DC Bias and Signals
3. Turning On and Off the AC BiasThe AC bias is turned on and off by the developing AC bias ON signal (DV_AC_ON) gener-
ated by the DC controller PCB.The DC controller PCB sends the developing AC bias ON signal (DV_AC_ON) to the com-
posite power supply PCB a specific period of time after copy paper has moved past the registrationsensor. The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB generates the AC biasoscillation signal (ACBIAS) so that an AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder.
The AC bias is modified/rectified and then supplied to the static eliminator (static eliminatorbias, about 3.2 kV).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-14
Developing DC biasVoltage supplied tothe scanning lamp
Toner save mode-75V-2V*1
-3V*2
Photo mode+15V-2V*1
-3V*2
Figure 4-108
If the machine is not equipped with a density correction switch (SW101), the image densitychanges in AE mode according to how the density adjusting lever is set.
The machine corrects the level of the developing DC bias and the voltage supplied to thescanning lamp as follows in reference to the setting used for normal copying when toner save modeor photo mode is selected.
SW101
4. Controlling the Voltage Level of the Developing DC BiasThe DC bias control signal (BIAS_PWM) is varied according to the following settings to
change the DC component of the developing bias so as to control the copy density:• Setting of the density adjusting lever (in manual adjustment mode)• Output of the AE sensor (in automatic control mode)• Setting of copy mode (toner save mode, photo mode)• Setting of the density correction switch (SW101)
The density correction switch (SW101) mounted on the DC controller PCB may be set to anyof three levels, enabling correction of foggy images or light images caused as by a change in thesensitivity of the photosensitive drum.
The density correction switch (SW101) affects both manual density adjustment and auto den-sity adjustment (AE).
Table 4-105 Relationship between Copying Mode and Voltage Correction Level
Figures 4-109 through -112 show the changes in the DC bias occurring as a result of changes inthe output of the AE sensor during auto density correction and how the density adjusting lever is setduring manual density adjustment.
*1: 120 V model*2: 220 / 240 V model
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-15
Figure 4-111 (Non-SW101) Figure 4-112 (Non-SW101)
Test sheet NewspaperOriginal density
0
-100
-200
-300
-400
-500
Developing bias DC component (V)
AE Mode
F1
F5
F9
1 6.50
-100
-200
-300
-400
-500
Developing bias DC component (V)
Manual Density Mode
3.5 9
Copy density adjusting lever
1 6.50
-100
-200
-300
-400
-500
Developing biasDC component (V)
Position of SW101
Right
Center
Left
Manual Density Mode
3.5 9
Copy density adjusting lever
Test sheet NewspaperOriginal density
0
-100
-200
-300
-400
-500
Developing bias DC component (V)
Position of SW101
Right
Center
Left
AE Mode
Figure 4-109 (SW101) Figure 4-110 (SW101)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-16
Figure 4-113
Scanning lamp
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
VR102
VR103J601
-3J107
-2
AEREF
AE-2 -3
-+
-+
-+
-+
Photo-sensitive
drum
Developing cylinder
(Q101)
(Q900)
Developing DCON signal
Serial communi-cation
AE sensor
DC controller PCBComposite power supply PCB
Mic
ropr
oces
sor
Mic
ropr
oces
sor
F. Measuring the Density of Originals
1. OutlineThe machine is equipped with an auto density adjustment (AE) mechanism designed to control
the DC component of the developing bias.The AE mechanism enables production of copies free of fogging as long as the original is more
or less uniform in density by varying the DC component of the developing bias according to thedensity of the original.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-17
Figure 4-115
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR AER SCFW SCFWSCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Scanner / lens drivemotor (M2)
AE signal (AE)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
SCRV
Figure 4-114
68.8mm(approx.)
23.5mm(approx.)
5.8mm(approx.)
37.7mm(approx.)
Middle of original
: Area read by AE sensor
2. OperationsWhen measuring the density of an original, the scanner turns on the scanning lamp, and moves
to a point 115 mm from the home position. At this time, the AE sensor reads the level of lightreflected by the area shown in Figure 4-112, and sends the AE signal (AE) to the DC controllerPCB.
In response, the DC controller PCB sends the developing DCON signal (serial communica-tion) to the composite power supply PCB according to the level of the AE signal. The microproces-sor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB controls the level of the DC bias applied to thedeveloping cylinder based on the level of this signal.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-18
Figure 4-116
J104 J103
3. AE Adjustment (VR102, VR103)If you have replaced the scanning lamp or the AE sensor PCB, make adjustments as follows:
Operating ProcedureBefore Starting the Work
• Obtain a newspaper showing more or less even print. (Do not use one with many photos orlarge headings.)
• Obtain five sheets of white sheets of paper.• Check to make sure that the intensity of the scanning lamp has been adjusted when you have
replaced the scanning lamp.• Set the density correction switch (SW101) to the middle setting. If the machine is not
equipped with a density correction switch, set the density adjusting lever to the middle set-ting.
1) Short JP103 and JP104 on the DC controller PCB with a screwdriver or the like.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-19
Figure 4-117
5) Place a newspaper on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.6) Turn VR102 so that the reading in the indicator is from ‘A3’ to ‘Ad’.
Figure 4-118
VR103
VR102
2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power switch.• The scanning lamp will turn on, an the main motor (M1) will rotate.
3) Stop shorting JP103 and JP104.4) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB fully clockwise.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-20
Figure 4-119
9) Repeat steps 5) through 8) so that the values of both VR102 and VR103 are target values.
Caution:If you cannot set VR102 and VR103 to the target values at the same time, turn VR103 fullycounterclockwise, and go back to step 5) and make adjustments once again.
10) Make a copy, and check to make sure that it is free of fogging and the density of its charactersis good.• If it is foggy or the characters are too light, go back to step 1) and start over.• If no change is noted after re-adjustment, use the density correcting switch (SW101).
Figure 4-120
VR103
SW101
Lighter
Darker
7) Remove the newspaper from the copyboard; in its place, place five blank sheets of copy paper,and close the copyboard cover.
8) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB so that the reading of the indicator is from ‘52’ to ‘5c’.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-21
Figure 4-121
Figure 4-122
Reflecting plate
Rear side blanking lamp
Lens shift detecting shaft
Front side blanking lamp
Reflecting plate(front)
A B
Photosensitive drum
Non-image area in Reduce mode
A: Position of the side blanking lamp in Direct and Reduce modeB: Position of the side blanking lamp in Reduce mode
B A
G. Controlling the Side Blanking Mechanism
1. OutlineThe machine is equipped with a side blanking lamp at the front and the rear used to prevent
adhesion of excess toner when making reduced copies.
2. OperationsTo blank out the non-image area in reduce mode, the side blanking lamp is moved in relation to
the distance over which the lens moves as detected by the lens shift detecting shaft.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-22
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-
tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)5. As necessary, cut the harnessband.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-23
Figure 4-201
a. Drum Cover ShutterIf exposed to strong light for a long time, the photosensitive drum can develop photo memory,
which can cause white spots or black bands on copies.To prevent photo memory, the machine is equipped with a drum cover shutter. Do not open the
shutter unless absolutely necessary. It is designed to open when the cartridge is fit into the machineand the machine's top unit is closed.
b. Light-Blocking ShutterWhen the cartridge is removed from the machine, light makes its way through the opening used
to expose images. As in the case of the drum cover shutter, the light-blocking shutter is provided toprotect the photosensitive drum from light.
Cleaning blade
Drum cover shutter Developing cylinder
Light-blocking shutterPrimary charging roller
Developing blade
Photosensitive drum
A. Cartridge
1. OutlineThe machine's photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing assembly, and cleaner
are housed in a single container referred to as a “cartridge.” (You cannot disassemble the cartridge.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-24
2. Cleaning the Drum
Caution:As a rule, do not touch or clean the photosensitive drum.
1) Open the machine's top unit, and take out the cartridge.2) Turn over the cartridge, and open the drum cover shutter3) Clean the drum surface with a flannel cloth coated with toner.
Caution:1. If you need to rotate the drum, be sure to rotate it in the direction in which it rotates when
making copies. Otherwise, the leaf spring used to apply a developing bias to the develop-ing cylinder will develop poor contact.
2. If you must clean it, use a flannel cloth. Do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.3. If exposed to light for an appreciable time, the images will be affected. Be sure to work
briskly.
Reference:If the photosensitive drum is exposed to light of 1500 lux (ordinary lighting) for 5 min andthen is left alone for 5 min in a dark place, it will recover to a level at which it will cause nopractical problem.However, avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. The rays of the sun are usually about 10000 to30000 lux.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-25
Figure 4-202
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
B. Transfer ChargingAssembly
1. Removing the Transfer ChargingRoller
1) Open the machine's top unit.2) Remove the screw [1].3) While freeing the claw [2] of the bushing,
detach the transfer charging roller [3].
Caution:Do not touch the surface of the roller. Besure the surface is free of dirt.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)4-26
Figure 4-203
[1]
C. Blank Exposure
1. Removing the Blanking ExposureUnit
1) Set the machine to the maximum ratio(141%) as follows:• Turn on the power, and select a default
ratio of 141%.• Press the Copy Start key.• When the lens has moved to the farthest
left, turn off the power.• Disconnect the power plug.
2) Remove the front lower cover.(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing theFront Lower Cover.”)
3) Remove the cartridge.4) Remove the DC controller PCB.
(See Chapter 7.III.E.1.“Removing the DCcontroller PCB.”)
5) Remove the composite power supplyPCB.(See Chapter 7.III.E.2.“Removing theComposite Power Supply PCB.”)
6) Remove the two screws [1].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-27
Figure 4-204
Figure 4-205
Figure 4-206
[3]
[4][5]
Lamp PCBs
7) Open the machine’s top unit farther, andhold it in place using the handle of ascrewdriver (about 30 mm in diameter).
8) Remove the four screws [3], and discon-nect the connector [4]; then, detach theblanking exposure unit. [5].
Caution:When mounting the blanking exposureunit, check to make sure that the blank-ing exposure unit PCBs are at the ex-treme ends and that the lens is positionedat the farthest left (141% position).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5
PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
This chapter explains the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to whena copy is delivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and inrelation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
I. PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM.......5-1A. Outline ...................................5-1B. Controlling the Pickup
Roller .....................................5-3C. Controlling the Movement of
Paper .....................................5-9D. Detecting Jams .................. 5-12
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 5-18
A. Pickup Assembly ................ 5-19B. Multifeeder Assembly ......... 5-28C. Single-feeder Assembly ..... 5-31D. Feeding Assembly .............. 5-33E. Registration Roller
Assembly ............................ 5-34F. Delivery Assembly .............. 5-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-1
Table 5-101
NotationPS3
PS4
PS5
Q751
NameDelivery sensor
Vertical path roller paper sensor
Single-feeder paper sensor
Pre-registration roller paper sensor
Remarks
Single-feeder model only
I. PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM
A. OutlineThe machine moves paper using a center reference method, in which paper is moved in the
middle of the pickup/feeding path, and is equipped with a cassette, multifeeder, and single-feederas the source of paper.
From the cassette, multifeeder, or single-feeder, copy paper is picked up and is controlled bythe registration roller so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on thephotosensitive drum; it is then moved through the transfer, separation, feeding, and fixing assem-blies to reach the copy tray.
The machine is equipped with four sensors used to monitor the movement of copy paper.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-2
Figure 5-101 (Multifeeder type)
Figure 5-102 (Single-feeder type)
Multifeederpickup roller
Cassettepickup roller
Verticalpath roller
Q751 PS4Staticeliminator
Photosensitivedrum
Holding plate
Cassette
Copy trayFixing assembly
Delivery roller
PS3
DC controller PCB
Registration roller
Del
iver
y pa
per d
etec
tion
sign
al(D
PD
)
Pre
-reg
istr
atio
n ro
ller
pape
rde
tect
ion
sign
al(R
PD
)
Ver
tical
pat
h ro
ller
pape
rde
tect
ion
sign
al(P
DP
)
Single-feederpickuproller
Verticalpath roller
Q751 PS4
PS5
Staticeliminator
Photosensitivedrum
Holding plate
Cassette
Copy tray Fixing assembly
Delivery roller
PS3
DC controller PCB
Registration roller
Del
iver
y pa
per
dete
ctio
n si
gnal
(DP
D)
Pre
-reg
istr
atio
n ro
ller
pape
rde
tect
ion
sign
al(R
PD
)
Ver
tical
pat
h ro
ller
pape
rde
tect
ion
sign
al(P
DP
)
Sin
gle-
feed
er p
aper
dete
ctio
n si
gnal
(SF
PD
)
Cassettepickup roller
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-3
B. Controlling the Pickup Roller
1. OutlineThe machine has three types of pickup rollers, i.e., cassette pickup roller, multifeeder pickup
roller, and single-feeder pickup roller, and each of these rollers are operated by the drive of themain motor switched by means of a gear unit. (In other words, only one roller is driven at any onetime.)
2. Controlling the Cassette Pickup RollerThe cassette pickup roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pickup clutch solenoid
(SL1), and cassette pickup solenoid (SL5).When the pickup clutch solenoid turns on, the claw moves away from the control ring, allow-
ing the drive to move to the pickup gear assembly through the spring clutch. Then, when the cas-sette pickup solenoid turns on, the drive reaches the cassette pickup roller.
When the cassette pickup roller starts to rotate, copy paper is picked up from the cassette and issent as far as the registration roller by way of the vertical path roller. The registration roller controlspaper so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.
Figure 5-103 (Multifeeder type)
M1
SL5
Copy paper
Cassette pickup rollers
Pickup clutch
SL1Arm
DC controller PCB
Cas
sette
pic
kup
sole
noid
driv
e si
gnal
(C
PU
SD
*)
Pic
kup
clut
chso
leno
iddr
ive
sign
al(P
US
LD*)
Spring
Pickup roller
Pickup roller gear
Gear
When SL5 turns on, the spring causesthe pickup roller to rotate slightly,causing the gear and the pickup rollergear to engage.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-4
Figure 5-104 (Single-feeder type)
M1SL1
SL5
Cas
sette
pic
kup
sole
noid
driv
e si
gnal
(C
PU
SD
*)
Pic
kup
clut
ch s
olen
oid
driv
e si
gnal
(P
US
LD*)
DC controller PCB
Copy paper
Pickup clutch
Arm
Cassette pickup rollers
Spring
Pickup roller
Pickup roller gear
Gear
When SL5 turns on, the spring causesthe pickup roller to rotate slightly,causing the gear and the pickup rollergear to engage.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-5
STBY INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY
Copy Start keyON
0.7sec (approx.)
II
I
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Vertical path roller papersensor (PS4)
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Main motor (M1)
I : Re-pickup operation is executed if the vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4) does not detectcopy paper within 0.5 sec after the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1) has turned don.
II : The cassette pickup solenoid (SL5) turns on once again about 1.3 sec after the pickup clutchsolenoid (SL1) turns on.
Figure 5-105
3. Re-Pickup (cassette pickup)If the vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4) does not detect copy paper within a specific period
of time after the cassette pickup roller has started to rotate, the pickup roller is rotated once again toexecute pickup operation, thereby ensuring correct pickup (as for recycled paper).
If the vertical path roller paper sensor does not detect copy paper after re-pickup, the machinewill assume the absence of copy paper and will indicate “” in the count/ratio indicator in thecontrol panel. (This mechanism substitutes a paper detecting mechanism.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-6
Figure 5-106
M1
SL1SL4
Cam gear
Spring clutch
Control ring Lifter
Multifeeder pickup roller
Paper guideplate
Copy paper
DC controller PCB
Mul
tifee
der
pick
upso
leno
id d
rive
sign
al (
MF
SLD
*)
Pic
kup
clut
chso
leno
id d
rive
sign
al (
PU
SLD
*)
Cam gear
Paper guide plate
The cam gear makes a 180˚ turn (approximate), causing the paper guide plate to move up and down.
Claw
Toothless section
4. Controlling the Multifeeder Pickup RollerThe multifeeder pickup roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pickup clutch sole-
noid (SL1), gear unit, and multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4).When the multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4) turns on, the drive of the main motor (M1)
reaches the cam gear. When the cam gear starts to rotate in response, the lifter, which is in contactwith the cam, moves up the gear unit and, at the same time, pushes down the paper guide plate. Thecam gear makes a 180° turn (approximate), and stops at the toothless section.
When the pickup solenoid turns on in this condition, the claw leaves the control ring, and thedrive of the main motor (M1) reaches the multifeeder pickup roller.
When the multifeeder pickup roller rotates, paper is picked up and sent as far as the registrationroller, which controls the paper so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image onthe photosensitive drum.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-7
Figure 5-107
M1
DC controller PCB
Pickup clutch
Single-feederpaper sensor
SL1
Single-feeder Pickup roller
Copy paper
Sin
gle-
feed
er p
aper
det
ectio
n si
gnal
(S
FP
D)
PS5
5. Controlling the Single-feeder Pickup RollerThe single-feeder pickup roller is controlled by the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1) and the
single-feeder paper sensor (PS5).When copy paper is inserted into the single-feeder, the single-feeder paper sensor turns on and
the main motor starts to rotate. The drive of the main motor reaches the signal feeder pickup rollerthrough a gear.
When the single-feeder pickup roller starts to rotate, copy paper is picked up from the signalfeeder and is sent as far as the registration roller, which controls the paper so that its leading edgewill match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-8
Figure 5-108
SCRV
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor (Q751)
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Switching to 9-cpm copying speed
Main motor (M1)
SCFW SCRV SCFW SCFWSCRV
I
19th copy
SCRV
I: A switch to 9-cpm copying mode is made after delivering the 19th copy in a continuouscopying job.
6. Controlling the Copying Speed in Multifeeder ModeThe machine does not possess a copy paper width detecting function and, therefore, the tem-
perature of the ends of the fixing assembly increases when copies are made continuously on papernarrower than A4/LTR.
When the multifeeder is used for continuous copying, a delay is initiated after picking up the19th sheet so as to increase the sheet-to-sheet distance for the sheets that follow, controlling thecopying speed to 9 cpm.
If the copying speed is controlled (to 6 cpm) by a mechanism to prevent overheating of thecopyboard, this control will not be executed, and moreover if the temperature of the copyboardincreases during 9-cpm control, 6-cpm control will be initiated.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-9
Figure 5-109
M1
Claw
SL2
DC controller PCB
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
sol
enoi
d dr
ive
sign
al(R
GS
LD*)
Pre-registration roller paper detection signal (RPD)
Pre-registrationroller papersensor(Q751)
Copy paper
Paper detecting leverRegistration rollerControl ring
Spring clutch
C. Controlling the Movement of Paper
1. Controlling the Registration RollerThe registration roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pre-registration roller paper
sensor (Q751), and registration clutch solenoid (SL2).The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB turns on the registration clutch solenoid at a
specific timing in response to the paper detection signal from the pre-registration roller paper sen-sor. When the registration clutch solenoid turns on, the claw will leave the control ring, and thedrive of the main motor will reach the registration roller to move the copy paper to the photosensi-tive drum.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-10
Figure 5-110
Figure 5-111
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW SCFWSCRV
Forward Reverse
LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Scanner
SCRV
0.7sec (approx.)
0.1sec (approx.)
0.3sec (approx.)
II
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)Vertical path rollerpaper sensor (PS4)Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor (Q751)
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)I
STBY INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)
Pre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
Scanner
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Copy paper inON
Forward Reverse
0.3sec (approx)
II
I
2. Pickup/Feeding Timing Charta. Pickup from the Cassette (A4, 2 copies)
b. Pickup from the Single-feeder (A4, 1 copy)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-11
STBY INTR SCFW SCFWSCRV
Forward Reverse
LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Scanner
Delivery sensor (PS3)
SCRV
0.7sec (approx.)
0.1sec(approx.)1sec
Copy Start keyON
I
II
0.3sec (approx.)
Multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4)
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor (Q751)
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
I : Varied by value under ‘30’ of service mode (registration adjustment).II : Used for measuring the length of copy paper.
length of copy paper (mm) = 96 (mm/s) × II (s) + 11 (mm) -10 (mm)96 (mm/s) : speed at which copy paper is moved.11 (mm) : distance between pre-registration roller paper sensor and registration roller.10 (mm) : length of actuator of the pre-registration roller paper sensor.
Figure 5-112
c. Pickup from the Multifeeder (A4, 2 copies)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-12
Figure 5-113 (Multifeeder type)
Figure 5-114 (Single-feeder type)
Multifeeder pickup roller
Cassette pickuproller
Verticalpath roller
Q751 PS4
Photosensitive drum
Cassette
Fixing assembly
Delivery roller
PS3
Registration roller
Single-feederpickup roller
Cassette pickuproller
Verticalpath roller
Q751 PS4
PS5Photosensitive drum
Cassette
Fixing assembly
Delivery roller
PS3
Registration roller
D. Detecting JamsThe machine is equipped with four paper sensors used to find out the presence/absence of copy
paper and whether copy paper is moving properly.• Vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4)• Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)• Pre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)• Delivery sensor (PS3)The presence/absence of a jam is checked with reference to the presence/absence of paper over
a specific sensor at such times as programmed in the microprocessor.The machine is not equipped with a function which remembers the remaining number of cop-
ies to make at time of a jam and the selected copying mode; in other words, it will be reset tostandard mode when it is opened and closed for the removal of the jam.
The microprocessor possesses the following eight types of no paper/jam detection sequence; ifany of its sensors detects copy paper at power-on, the machine will identify the condition as a jam.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-13
1. Multifeeder Pickup Assembly (no paper, pickup delay jam)If copy paper does not reach the pre-registration roller paper sensor within a specific period of
time in multifeeder mode, the condition will be identified as the absence of paper; the machine willstop the main motor in about 1.5 sec, and indicate the Add Paper message.
If the pre-registration roller paper sensor detects copy paper during this 1.5 sec period (ap-proximate), the machine will identify the condition as a pickup delay jam, and flash the Jam indica-tor.
Figure 5-115 (normal)
Figure 5-116 (no paper)
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Jam checkPre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)
Main motor (M1)
2.6sec
Normal
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Jam checkPre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)
Main motor (M1)
2.6sec
No paper
P indication
1.5sec
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-14
Figure 5-118
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW
No paper
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Jam check
Main motor (M1)
Vertical path rollerpaper sensor (PS4)
1.2sec 1.2sec
1.5sec
1.2sec
P indication
Re-pickup
Normal
Figure 5-117 (jam)
2. Absence of Paper in the Cassette Pickup AssemblyWhen re-pickup operation is executed (from the cassette) , the absence of paper will be identi-
fied if copy paper doesnot reach the vertical path roller paper sensor within a specific period oftime. In responce, the machine will stop the main motor in about 1.5 sec, and indicate the AddPaper message.
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Jam checkPre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)
Main motor (M1)
2.6sec
Jam
1.5sec
No paper
indication
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-15
Figure 5-119
4. Vertical Path Stationary JamIf copy paper fails to move past the vertical path roller paper sensor within a specific period of
time because of faulty feeding, the machine will identify the condition as a vertical path stationaryjam, stop the operation, and flash the Jam indicator.
Copy paper inserted
STBY INTR SCFW
Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)
Jam checkPre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)
Main motor (M1)
5.1 sec
Jam
1.5 sec
3. Single-feeder Pickup Delay JamAfter being detected by the single-feeder paper sensor, if copy paper does not reach the pre-
registration roller sensor within a specific period of time, the machine will identify the condition asa single feed pickup delay jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
Figure 5-120
SCRV SCFW SCRV
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Jam check
Main motor (M1)
Vertical path rollerpaper sensor (PS4)
1.5sec
Normal
0.5sec
Jam
0.5sec
indication
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-16
Figure 5-122
Figure 5-121
6. Registration Paper Stationary JamIf copy paper does not move past the pre-registration roller paper sensor within a specific
period of time because of feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a registrationpaper stationary jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
SCRV SCFW SCRV
Vertical path rollerpaper sensor (PS4)
Jam check
Main motor (M1)
Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor (Q751)
1.5sec
Jam
2.6sec
Normal
2.6sec
indication
5. Registration Paper Delay JamAfter reaching the vertical path roller paper sensor, if copy paper fails to reach the pre-registra-
tion roller paper sensor within a specific period of time, the machine will identify the condition asa registration paper delay jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW
Jam
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
Jam check
Main motor (M1)
Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor (Q751)
1.5sec
4.6sec
Normal
4.6sec
indication
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-17
Figure 5-123
8. Delivery Stationary JamIf copy paper does not move past the delivery sensor within a specific period of time because of
feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a delivery stationary jam, stop the opera-tion immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
Copy Start keyON
STBY INTR SCFW
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
Jam check
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Main motor (M1)
4.1sec
normal
SCRV SCFW
4.1sec
indication
Jam
1.5sec
7. Delivery Delay JamIf copy paper does not reach the delivery sensor within a specific period of time because of
feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a delivery delay jam, stop the operationimmediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
Figure 5-124
SCFW
Jam check
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Main motor (M1)
4.1sec
SCRV SCFW
4.1sec
SCRV SCFW
Normal
indication
Jam
1.5sec
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-18
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-
tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)5. As necessary, cut the harnessband.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-19
Figure 5-201
Figure 5-202
[1]
[2][3]
A. Pickup Assembly
1. Removing the Pickup Roller1) Pull out the cassette.2) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing theFront Lower Cover.”)
3) Open the machines' top unit farther, andhold it in place with the handle of a screw-driver (about 30 mm in diameter).
4) Remove the screw [1], and free the twoclaws [2]; then, detach the feeding assem-bly cover [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-20
Figure 5-203
Figure 5-204
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[8]
5) While pulling the guide plate [4] of thecassette pickup solenoid in the directionof the arrow, turn the gear [5] slightly inthe direction of the arrow to disengage theguide plate [4] and the gear [6].
6) While pulling the plunger [7] of thepickup solenoid, turn the gear [8] in thedirection of the arrow so that the pickuproller [9] is oriented as shown.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-21
Figure 5-205
Figure 5-206
Hex wrench
[10]
Pickup roller shaft[11]
Pickup gear unit
7) Using a hex wrench or the like, push thehook [10] of the pickup roller through thehole to remove the pickup roller [11].
Caution:When removing the pickup roller, besure to push the claw while holding theshaft in place so as to prevent the pickuproller shaft from freeing itself.
Caution:When mounting the multifeeder unit,perform the next steps first:1) Turn on the power switch; then, se-
lect the multifeeder, and press theCopy Start key.
2) When the pickup gear unit has movedup as far as it can, turn off the powerswitch.
3) Mount the multifeeder; then, make acopy using the multifeeder.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-22
Figure 5-207
Figure 5-208
[1]
[2]
[3]
2. Removing the Pickup Clutch2.1 Removing the Pickup Clutch (single-
feeder type)1) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing theFront Lower Cover.”)
2) Remove the registration roller unit.(See E.1.“Removing the RegistrationRoller Unit.”)
3) Open the machine’s top unit, and hold it inplace using the handle of a screwdriver(about 30 mm in diameter).
4) Disconnect the connector [1], and removethe screw [2]; then, detach the solenoidunit [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-23
Figure 5-209
Figure 5-210
Figure 5-211
[5]
[6]
[5][4]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[9]
[10]
[11]
5) Remove the screw [4] and the two claws[5], and detach the gear unit [6].
6) Free the claw [7] of the gear unit [6], anddetach the clutch unit [8].
7) Remove the E-ring [9] and the washer[10], and detach the pickup clutch [11].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-24
Figure 5-212
Figure 5-213
[1]
[2]
[3]
2.2 Removing the Pickup Clutch(multifeeder type)
1) Remove the front lower cover.(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing theFront Lower Cover.”)
2) Remove the registration roller unit.(See E.1.“Removing the RegistrationRoller Unit.”)
3) Open the machine’s top unit farther, andhold it in place with the handle of a screw-driver (about 30 mm in diameter).
4) Disconnect the two connectors [1], andremove the two screws [2] then, detachthe solenoid unit [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-25
Figure 5-214
Figure 5-215
[4] [4][5]
[6]
[7]
5) While freeing the two claws [4], removethe pickup clutch unit [5].
6) Remove the E-ring [6], and detach thepickup clutch [7].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-26
Figure 5-216
Figure 5-217
[1]
[2][3]
3. Removing the Vertical Path Roller1) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing theFront Lower Cover.”)
2) Open the machine’s top unit farther, andhold it using the handle of a screwdriver(about 30 mm in diameter).
3) Remove the screw [1], and free the twoclaws [2]; then, detach the feeding assem-bly cover [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-27
Figure 5-218
[4]
[5]4) While lifting the sensor lever [4], removethe vertical path roller [5].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-28
Figure 5-219
Figure 5-220
[1]
[2]
[1]
Pickupgear unit
B. Multifeeder Assembly
1. Removing the Multifeeder Unit1) Open the right door.2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the multifeeder unit [2].
Caution:When mounting the multifeeder unit,perform the following first:1) Turn on the power switch; then, se-
lect the multifeeder, and press theCopy Start key.
2) When the pickup gear unit has movedas far as it can, turn off the powerswitch.
3) Mount the multifeeder unit; then,make a copy using the multifeeder.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-29
Figure 5-221
Figure 5-222
Figure 5-223
[2] [1] [1] [3]
[4]
[6][5]
2. Removing the Multifeeder PickupRoller
1) Remove the multifeeder unit.(See 1. “Removing the MultifeederUnit.”)
2) Free the claw [1], and remove the gear [2]and the bushing [3].
3) Remove the multifeeder pickup roller unit[4].
4) While freeing the claw [5], detach themultifeeder pickup roller [6].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-30
Figure 5-224
Figure 5-225
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[5]
3. Removing the Separation Pad1) Remove the multifeeder pickup roller to-
gether with its shaft.(See 2. “Removing the MultifeederPickup Roller.”)
2) Remove the multifeeder tray.3) Slide the side guide [1] to the inside about
3 cm, and free the two claws [2]; then, de-tach the holding plate [3].
4) Push up the separation pad [4], and pull itout by pushing the shaft [5] toward the in-side.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-31
Figure 5-226
[1]
[2]
[1]
C. Single-feeder Assembly
1. Removing the Single-feeder Unit1) Open the right door.2) Remove the two screws [1], and remove
the single-feeder unit [2].
Figure 5-227
Figure 5-228
2. Removing the Single-feederPickup Roller
1) Remove the single-feeder unit.(See 1. “Removing the Single-feederUnit.”)
2) Push up the stopper lever [1], and movethe gear [2] of the single-feeder pickuproller assembly in the direction of the ar-row.
3) Remove the single-feeder pickup rollerassembly [4] together with the paperguide plate [3].
[1] [2]
[4][3]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-32
Figure 5-229
[3]
[5]
[6]4) Free the claw [5] of the paper guide plate[3], and remove the single-feeder pickuproller [6].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-33
Figure 5-230
Figure 5-231
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3][3]
[4]
[4]
[4] [4]
[5]
[5][5]
D. Feeding Assembly
1. Detaching the Feed Belt1) Open the machine’s top unit.2) Push down the stopper [1], and remove
the gear [2].
3) While freeing the claw [3], detach the fourshafts [4]; then, detach the feed belt [5].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-34
Figure 5-233
[3]
[2]
[2]
Figure 5-232
[1]
[1]
E. Registration RollerAssembly
1. Removing the Registration RollerUnit
1) Open the machine’s top unit.2) Remove the spring [1] (front, rear).
3) Remove the two bushings [2] and removethe registration roller lower unit [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-35
Figure 5-234
Figure 5-235
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
2. Removing the Registration RollerClutch
1) Remove the registration roller unit.(See 1. “Removing the RegistrationRoller Unit.”)
2) Remove the bushing [1] and the E-ring[2].
3) While shifting down the registration roller[3], detach it from the gear unit [4].
Figure 5-236
4) Remove the E-ring [5], and detach theregistration roller clutch [6].
Caution:The clutch has a pin. Take care not tolose it when removing the clutch.
[5]
[6]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-36
Figure 5-237
Figure 5-238
[1]
[3][3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
F. Delivery Assembly
1. Removing the Delivery Roller1) Remove the fixing lower roller.
(See Chapter 6.II.A.3.“Removing the Fix-ing Lower Roller.”)
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detachthe side plate [2] and the four gears [3].
3) Remove the screw [4], and free the twohooks [5]; then, detach the sensor holder[6].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-37
Figure 5-239
Figure 5-240
4) Remove the two bushings [7].
5) While shifting the delivery lower guide[8] toward the rear, detach the deliveryroller [9].
[7]
[8]
[9]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6
FIXING SYSTEM
This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium inview of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing ofoperation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
I. OPERATIONS ..............................6-1A. Outline ...................................6-1B. Controlling the Fixing
Temperature ..........................6-3
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 6-10A. Fixing Assembly ................. 6-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-1
Table 6-101
ItemFixing method
Fixing drive
Fixing heater
Fixing temperaturedetection
Cleaner
Protective functions
Error code
DescriptionSURF
Main Motor (M1)
Flat heater
Thermistor (TH1)
Cleaning roller
The following are used to detect and protect againstan error; upon detection, power to the fixing heaterwill be cut:• Thermistor (TH1)• Thermal fuse (FU2; activating at 228°C)
E000 The fixing temperature fails to increase.E001 The thermistor has detected overheating.E002 Fault in fixing power control.E003 The fixing temperature has dropped
abnormally.
I. OPERATIONS
A. Outline
The major functions of the fixing unit are as follows:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)6-2
Figure 6-101
Figure 6-102
Cleaning roller
Fixing lower roller
Fixing thermistor (TH1)
Thermal fuse 2 (FU2) Fixing film
Fixing heater (H1)
M1
Fix
ing
ther
mis
tor
sign
al (
TH
1)
DC controller PCB
Composite power supply PCB
Main motor
Fixing lower roller
Cleaning roller
Fixing film
Fixing heater (H1)
Thermal fuse 2 (FU2)
Fixing thermistor (TH1)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-3
B. Controlling the Fixing Temperature
1. OutlineThe fixing lower roller of the fixing assembly is driven by the main motor (M1). When the
fixing lower roller rotates, the film of the fixing upper unit starts to rotate in conjunction.The fixing film is heated by the fixing heater (H1), which is a flat heater mounted in contact
with the inner side of the film. The fixing heater is equipped with a thermistor (TH1), which sendsthe fixing thermistor signal (TH1) to the microprocessor (Q101) on the DC controller PCB; inresponse, the microprocessor controls the fixing heater duty signal (HEAT_PWM) to vary thepower supplied to the heater by way of controlling the temperature of the fixing heater.
Figure 6-103
DC controller PCB
HEAT_TRG
HEAT_OFFMicro-
processor
+5V
Auxiliarypower supply
+5V
RelayRL601
Thermalfuse 2
Fixing heater hightemperature
error detection circuitTH1
HEAT_ERR*
(Q101)
Timercircuit
RLOFF*
Fixing heaterdrive signal
Fixing heatererror signal
Fixing heaterOFF signal
HEAT_PWM
Fixing heaterduty signal
FU2
Relaydrive signal
Fixingthermistor
Fixing heaterH1
Composite powersupply PCB
E0_DT
E0 detection signal
C12
3 +
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)6-4
2. Controlling the Temperature of the Fixing HeaterThe temperature of the fixing heater is switched according to the following two parameters:• Temperature of the fixing heater when the Copy Start key is pressed.• Number of copies to make in continuous copying mode
Table 6-102 shows the temperature of the fixing heater when the Copy Start key is pressed (asdetected by the thermistor TH1) and the temperatures to which the fixing heater is controlled ac-cording to the number of copies made in continuous mode.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-5
Heater temperature when the CopyStart key is pressedLess than 100°C
100°C or more and less than 120°C
120°C or more
Number of copies
12 ~ 9
10 ~ 2930 ~ 3940 ~ 4950 ~ 59
60 ~1 ~ 9
10 ~ 1920 ~ 2930 ~ 39
40 ~1 ~ 9
10 ~ 1920 ~
Control temperature (°C)
200195190185180175170190186180175170180175170
1
2
3
Figure 6-104
Power switchON
Copy Start keyON
Copy Start keyON Copying end
STBY STBY CopyingCopying STBY
Main motor (M1)
Fixing heater (H1)
Number of Copies in Continuous Copying Mode after a Press on the Copy Start Key
Controlling theTemperature ofthe Fixing Heater( C)
200
195
190
185
180
Copying end
1 10 30 40 1 11 21
120
100
Table 6-102
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)6-6
Figure 6-106
Figure 6-105
4. Correcting the Variation in the Resistance of the Fixing HeaterThe characteristics of the flat heater used as the fixing heater vary from heater to heater because
the production method. A discrepancy in resistance, if left alone, will not enable correct control ofthe fixing heater.
The machine makes correction in relation to the selected level of resistance (from three set-tings), and corrects it basd on the readings obtained by the microprocessor.
Caution:The level of resistance of the fixing heater is selected by an appropriate combination of thejumper wires connected to the connector of the fixing thermistor (TH1) and the deliverysensor (PS3).The best level is selected at the factory when the fixing assembly is assembled. Do not changethe combination of jumper wires.
HEAT_PWM
Power supplied to the heater
3. Controlling the Temperature Supplied to the Fixing HeaterThe temperature of the fixing heater is controlled by controlling the power supplied to the
fixing heater, and the power to the fixing heater is controlled using a phase control method.The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB controls the timing at which the fixing heater
duty signal (HEAT_PWM) is generated so that power suited to the target temperature of the fixingheater may be supplied (phase control).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-7
Figure 6-107
5. Controlling the Power Supplied to the Fixing Heater between SheetsWhen the copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm to prevent overheating of the copyboard, the
temperature of the fixing lower roller tends to increase because of the increased sheet-to-sheetdistance. To prevent possible problems, power to the fixing heater is stopped between sheets whenthe copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm.
Switching to 6-cpm copying speed
SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
Fixing heater (H1)
Scanner
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Main motor (M1)
Forward Reverse
SCFW SCRV
Heater ON
Heater OFF
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)6-8
6. Protective FunctionsThe machine is equipped with the following protective functions to prevent malfunction of the
fixing heater.a. Thermistor (TH1)
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB monitors the voltage of the thermistor (TH1); ifan abnormally high or low temperature is detected, the microprocessor sends the fixing heater errorsignal (HEAT_ERR*) to the timer circuit and, at the same time, indicate an error code (E000through E003).
In response, the timer circuit sends the relay drive signal (RLOFF*) to the auxiliary powersupply in about 1.2 sec after it hs received the fixing heater error signal (HEAT_ERR*).
The auxiliary power supply turns off the relay (RL601) to turn off the power. Then, the data of‘E0’ (associated with the heater) is retained so as to indicate ‘E0’ when the power is turned on thenext time.
‘E0’ is backed up for about 5 min. After ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ is indicated in the control paneland the power is turned off, the machine will indicate ‘E0’ in the control panel if the power switchis turned on within 5 min, not recognizing a press on the Copy Start key. If the Copy Start key ispressed after about 5 min, however, a press on the Copy Start key will be recognized.
If an error is detected in relation to the heater during copying operation, the machine willindicate ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ in the control panel once again and turn off the power.
Related Error Code
E000• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is not 65°C in 1.5 sec after the Copy
Start key is pressed.• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is not 150°C in 4 sec after the Copy
Start key is pressed.
E001• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 230°C or more.• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is higher than the control temperature
by 30°C or more.• The thermistor (TH1) has detected an increase in temperature of 100°C or more in 1 sec.• The thermistor (TH1) has detected an increase in temperature of 40°C or more after it
detected 100°C in standby state.• E0 detection signal (E0_DT) has been detected twice in succession.
E002The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 150°C or higher and, thereafter, maxi-mum power has been supplied to the fixing heater for 10 to 14 sec during copying operation.
E003The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 160°C and then 150°C or lower duringcopying operation.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-9
b. Thermal Fuse (FU2)If the temperature around the thermal fuse exceeds 228°C and remains so for a specific period
of time, the thermal fuse will blow to cut the power to the fixing heater.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)6-10
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-
tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)5. As necessary, cut the harness band.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-11
Figure 6-201
Figure 6-202
[5] [4] [3]
[1] [2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1] Fixing heater[2] Fixing film[3] Inlet guide
[4] Fixing lower roller[5] Cleaning roller
A. Fixing Assembly
1. ConstructionCaution:
1. The fixing film is made from a spe-cial material. Do not touch it or sub-ject it to dust.
2. The machine does not have a mecha-nism used to adjust the roller pres-sure.
2. Removing the Fixing Assembly1) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing theFront Lower Cover.”)
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the twohooks [2]; then, detach the power supplycover [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)6-12
Figure 6-203
Figure 6-204
[5]
[4]
[8]
[6]
[7]
3) Remove the screw [4], and disconnect theconnector [5].
4) Remove the two screws [6], and discon-nect the connector [7]; then, detach thefixing assembly [8] by turning it in the di-rection of the arrow.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-13
Figure 6-205
Figure 6-206
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
3. Removing the Fixing Lower Roller1) Remove the fixing assembly.
(See 2. “Removing the Fixing Assem-bly.”)
2) Remove the two screws [1], and free thetwo hooks [2]; then, detach the fixing up-per stay [3] by turning it in the direction ofthe arrow.
3) Detach the harness band [4] from the sideplate, and remove the fixing upper unit[5].
Caution:Do not disassemble the fixing film andthe fixing heater. They cannot be re-placed on their own.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)6-14
4. Removing the Cleaning Roller1) Remove the fixing lower roller.
(See 3. “Removing the Fixing LowerRoller.”)
2) Remove the cleaning roller [1] togetherwith the bushing.
Figure 6-208
[1]
Figure 6-207
[6]4) Remove the fixing lower roller [6] to-gether with the gear.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7
EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
This chapter shows the machine's external parts, and explains the principles used forthe machine's various control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical andmechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these unitsmay be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
I. FANS ............................................7-1II. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM .........7-3
A. Outline of the Power SupplySystem ..................................7-3
B. Power Supply Circuit .............7-4C. Detecting an Error on
the Composite Power SupplyPCB .......................................7-6
D. Protecting the Power SupplyCircuit ....................................7-6
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ........7-7A. External Covers .....................7-8B. Control Panel...................... 7-15C. Copyboard Glass ............... 7-16D. Main Motor/Main Drive
Assembly ............................ 7-17E. Electrical System ............... 7-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-1
Figure 7-101
Heat exhausting fan
FM1
I. FANS
The machine is equipped with two fans serving to discharge ozone or cool its inside.The heat exhaust fan is driven directly by the main motor (M1; through a belt and a gear), and
is designed to rotate at all times while the main motor is rotating.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-2
Figure 7-102
I: If 6-cpm copying speed control is executed starting with the first copy, the fan will rotate.
STBY INTR SCFW
Forward
SCFWSCRV
Reverse
LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Scanner cooling fan (FM1)
Scanner
Heat exhausting fan
I
SCRV
Power switchON
Copy Start keyON
The scanner cooling fan (FM1) is turned on and off according to the temperature detected bythe scanner thermistor (TH2).
If the reading by the thermistor is 37.5°C or higher and the copying speed reaches 6 cpm, thefan starts to rotate. If the reading is lower than 37.5°C, on the other hand, the fan will not rotate ifno more than one copy is made or while making the first copy of a continuous copying job. (Itrotates when making the second and subsequent copies of a continuous copying job.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-3
Figure 7-201
Power plug
DS1Composite power supply circuit
Noise filter circuit
Door switch
RelayRL601
FU102
Trans-former
T600
Auxiliary power supply circuit
+5V
Micro-processor
(Q900)
Main transformer
T101
Fixing heater control circuit
DC power supply circuit
Scanning lamp
control circuit
High-voltage power supply circuit
+24VR
+24VU
+5V
+5V
+24VR
+24VU
+24VU
+24VU
Control panel
AE sensor
+5VSensorTo ADF
Solenoid
Scanner/lens drive motor (M2)
Blanking lamp
+24VU
+24VU
Scanner cooling fan
M1Main motor/main motor driver PCB
Fixing heater
Primary charging roller
Scanning lamp
Developing roller
Transfer roller
Static eliminator
DCcontroller
PCB
II. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. Outline of the Power Supply System
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-4
B. Power Supply Circuit
The machine’s power supply consists of a composite power supply circuit in which a DCpower supply, scanning lamp power supply, and high-voltage power supply are integrated on asingle board. It also possesses a microprocessor for exchanges of various data with the machine'sDC controller PCB.
The machine’s power switch is a soft switch, and the machine is equipped with an auxiliarypower supply used to operate the switch. The auxiliary power supply provides the microprocessor(Q900) with +5 V as long as the door switch (DS1) remains on.
AC power is supplied to the DC power supply when the power switch on the control panel isturned on. In response, the DC power supply provides the DC controller PCB with +5 V, +24 VR,and +24 VU.
When the power switch is turned off, the power to the DC controller PCB is cut off. To back itup against ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, and ‘E003’, the machine is equipped with a DC capacitor as partof the DC controller circuit.
When ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’ occurs, the capacitor (C123) collects electric charge;if charge exists in the capacitor while the power switch is on, the machine indicates ‘E0’ on thecontrol panel to indicate that an error related to the fixing heater has occurred.
Note:The backup capacitor (C123) retains electric charge for about 5 min after the power switch isturned off.
Reference:The tolerances in DC voltage are as follows:• +5 V ±5%• +24 VR ±5%• +24 VU -10.0%, +12.5%For +24 VR, two types of voltage are used:• During copying, +24 V ±5%• During standby, +18 V ±10%
However, the above assume that the deviations in AC input are -15%, +10%.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-5
Figure 7-202
Door switchDS1
Auxiliary power supply
RelayRL601
FU102
+5V
Microprocessor (Q900)
C123
Power switchSW309
Control panel DC controller PCB Power supply
Main transfor-
merT101
DC power supply
+5V+24VR+24VU
+
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-6
C. Detecting an Error on the Composite Power Supply PCB
The machine’s composite power supply PCB is equipped with a self diagnostic function tocheck each power output and the communication with the DC controller PCB using the micropro-cessor (Q900) mounted on it.
If any of the following errors occurs, the microprocessor will exchange signals with the DCcontroller PCB, and will indicate the result of self diagnosis on the control panel.
1. Detecting an Over-Current in the Low-Voltage SystemIf an over-current is detected because of a fault in a DC load, the composite power supply PCB
will turn off the relay (RL601) to cut the AC input.
2. Detecting a Fault in the High-Voltage Control ValueIf a deviation is found between the setting value and the actual value is detected in any of the
following voltages, the composite power supply will indicate ‘E064’ on the control panel.• Primary charging DC bias• Developing DC bias• Transfer bias
3. Detecting a Fault in the Low-Voltage Control ValueIf a deviation is detected between the setting value and the actual control value in +24 V (DC
output), the composite power supply PCB will indicate ‘E803’ on the control panel.
4. Fault in the Communication with the DC ControllerIf the DC controller PCB detects a fault in the communication with the composite power sup-
ply PCB, ‘E240’ will be indicated on the control panel for about 4 sec, and then the relay (RL601)will be turned off to cut the AC input.
D. Protecting the Power Supply Circuit
The composite power supply PCB is equipped with an over-current detection function whichturns on a protective mechanism to stop output if a load suffers a short-circuit.
If the output has stopped, it may be reset by opening the machine’s top unit, correcting the load,and then turning the power switch back on.
Keep in mind, however, that repeated short-circuiting and resetting can blow the fuse (FU102).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-7
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-
tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)5. As necessary, cut the harness band.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-8
Figure 7-301 (Copyboard type)
[2]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[1] Copyboard cover[2] Top cover[3] Control panel[4] Front lower cover
[5] Cassette[6] Front upper cover[7] Left cover
A. External Covers
For instructions on how to remove theADF, see Chapter 8.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-9
Figure 7-303
Figure 7-302 (ADF type)
[1] ADF[2] Top cover[3] Control panel[4] Front lower cover
[5] Cassette[6] Front upper cover[7] Left cover
[2]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] Rear cover[2] Right door[3] Multifeeder unit
Note:Remove the covers as necessary whencleaning, inspecting, or repairing the in-side of the machine.Those covers that may be detached fromtheir own by mere removal of mountingscrews are omitted from the discussions.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-10
Figure 7-304
Figure 7-305
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3] [3][4]
1. Removing the Top Cover1) Remove the copyboard cover or the ADF.2) Open the machine’s top unit.3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the front upper cover [2].
Caution:A flexible cable for the control panel isconnected to the front upper cover. Dis-connect the cable from the DC control-ler.
4) Free the two claws [3], and slide the leftcover [4] to detach.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-11
Figure 7-306
Figure 7-307
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
5) Remove the screw [5], and free the fourclaws [6]; then, detach the rear cover [7].
6) Remove the screw [8], and detach thecopyboard cover foot retainer [9].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-12
Figure 7-308
[10]
[11]
[10]
7) Free the two claw [10]; then lift the topcover [11] to detach.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-13
Figure 7-309
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[4]
Figure 7-310
2. Removing the Front Lower Cover1) Open the right door.2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the multifeeder unit [2] (or the single-feeder unit).
3) Open the machine’s top unit.4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach
the front upper cover [4].
Caution:A flexible cable for the control panel isconnected to the front upper cover. Dis-connect the cable from the DC control-ler.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-14
Figure 7-312
Figure 7-313
[6]
[6]
[7]
Pickup gear unit
Figure 7-311
[5]5) Remove the two screws [5] from thescrew plate found at the bottom of the ma-chine.
6) While freeing the five claws [6], detachthe front lower cover [7].
Caution:When mounting the multifeeder unit, besure to perform the following first:1) Turn on the power switch; then, se-
lect the multifeeder as the source ofpaper, and press the Copy Start key.
2) When the pickup gear unit assemblyhas moved to its upper limit, turn offthe power switch.
3) Mount the multifeeder, and make onecopy using it as the source of paper.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-15
Figure 7-314
Figure 7-315
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
Lighter Darker
Auto ExposureManual Exposure
PhotoTimer Saver
Move to the right
[5]
[6]
[3]
[7]
B. Control Panel
1. Removing the Control Panel1) Open the machine’s top unit.2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the front upper cover [2].
Caution:A flexible cable for the control panel isconnected to the front upper cover. Dis-connect the cable from the DC control-ler.
3) Free the claw [3], and remove the powersupply switch assembly [4]. Move thecopy density adjusting lever [5] to the far-thest right, and free the four claws [6];then, detach the control panel [7].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-16
Figure 7-316
Figure 7-317
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
Grounding plate
Copyboard glass
C. Copyboard Glass
1. Removing the Copyboard Glass1) Remove the top cover. (See A.1. “Remov-
ing the Top Cover.”)2) Close the machine’s top unit.3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the two support plates [2]; then, detach thecopyboard glass [3].
Note:When mounting the copyboard glass, besure that the grounding plate is on theside of its top edge. (ADF type only)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-17
Figure 7-318
Figure 7-319
[1]
[2]
[3]
D. Main Motor/Main DriveAssembly
1. Removing the Main Motor Unit1) Remove the drum cartridge.2) Remove the composite power supply
PCB.(See E.2. “Removing the CompositePower Supply PCB.”)
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach thehigh-voltage PCB [2].
4) Remove the insulating sheet [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-18
Figure 7-321
[5]
[5]
[6]
[4]
Figure 7-320
5) Detach the fan belt [4].
6) Remove the four screws [5], and detachthe main motor unit [6].
Caution:When installing the main motor unit, besure to attach the fan belt.After attaching the fan belt, make surethat the belt is free of twists.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-19
Figure 7-322
Figure 7-323
[1]
[2]
[3]
2. Removing the Main Drive Assem-bly
1) Remove the drum cartridge.2) Remove the composite power supply
PCB.(See E.2. “Removing the CompositePower Supply PCB.”)
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach thehigh-voltage PCB [2].
4) Remove the insulating sheet [3].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-20
Figure 7-324
Figure 7-325
[4]
[5]
[5]
[6]
5) Detach the fan belt [4].
6) Remove the five screws [5], and detachthe main drive assembly [6].
Caution:When installing the main drive assem-bly, be sure to attach the fan belt.After attaching the fan belt, make surethat the belt is free of twists.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-21
Figure 7-326
Figure 7-327
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[5]
E. Electrical System
1. Removing the DC Controller PCB1) Open the machine’s top unit.2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
front upper cover [2].
Caution:A flexible cable for the control panel isconnected to the front upper cover. Dis-connect the cable from the DC control-ler.
3) Disconnect all connectors from the DCcontroller PCB, remove the screw [3], andfree the six claws [4]; then, detach the DCcontroller PCB [5].
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-22
Figure 7-328
Figure 7-329
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[3] [4]
2. Removing the Composite PowerSupply PCB
1) Remove the copyboard cover or the ADF.2) Remove the left cover and the rear cover.3) Remove the screw [1], and remove the
copyboard cover foot retainer [2].
4) Disconnect the ten connectors [3] fromthe composite power supply PCB, anddisconnect the connector [4] from themain motor assembly.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-23
5) Remove the seven screws [5], and free thefive claws [6]; then, detach the compositepower supply PCB [7].
Figure 7-330
[5]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)7-24
3. Points to Note When Handling theComposite Power Supply PCB
1) Some capacitors on the composite powersupply hold charges when the machine’spower supply is off.Take extra care never to short the termi-nals of the capacitor whenever you haveremoved the composite power supplyPCB.
2) When handling the PCB, hold its heat ra-diating plate (at the center) or its bothedges. In particular, keep in mind thatholding the area indicated by “ ” cancause deformation or cracking of theboard.
Figure 7-331
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8
ADF
I. ADF ..............................................8-1A. Outline ...................................8-1B Basic Construction ................8-2C. Basic Operations ...................8-4D. Detecting an Original ............8-6E. Pickup Operation ...................8-8F. Delivery .............................. 8-12G. Controlling the Pickup
Motor .................................. 8-14
H. Controlling the Belt Motor .. 8-15I. Detecting Original Jams ..... 8-16J. Power Supply ..................... 8-17
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 8-18A. Removing the ADF ............. 8-19B. External Covers .................. 8-21C. Drive System ...................... 8-23D. Feeding System ................. 8-26E. Electrical System ............... 8-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-1
I. ADF
A. Outline
The ADF picks up the originals stacked on the original tray starting with the topmost original,moves them through the copyboard, and delivers them.
See Figure 8-101 for an outline of the feeding route.
Figure 8-101
ADF
Original tray
Copier
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-2
B Basic Construction
1. Outline of the Electric CircuitryThe ADF’s major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the CPU on the ADF controller
PCB.The CPU on the ADF controller PCB reads the signals from the sensors and the copier and
generates signals to drive the motor at such times as programmed in advance.The copying modes selected on the copier are communicated to the ADF in serial, and the ADF
communicates to the copier the state of feeding originals to the copier in serial. (It does not use anIC for communications.)
Figure 8-102
Serial communication
Copier
CompositepowersupplyPCB
24V 5VROM(Q2)
CPU(Q1)
Switch
Sensor
ADFcontroller PCB
Motor
[Output block][Control block][Input block]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-3
2. Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF Controller PCBa. Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF Controller PCB (1/1)
Figure 8-103
ADF switch
Registration papersensor
Original placementsensor
Delivery sensor
PI1
J105
J6-1
-2
ADF controller PCB
J5-1
J5-4
J5-7
-3
-2
-6
-5
-9
-8
J3-1
-2
+24V
MS1ADFC When ADF is opened, '1'.
PDP1 When original is detected, '1'. (when light-blocking plate is at sensor)
+5V
+5V
+5V
PDP2 When original is detected, '0'. (when light-blocking plate is at sensor)
PDP3 When original is detected, '0'. (when light-blocking plate is at sensor)
See p. 8-15.M1
M2Pickup motor
Belt motor
-3-4
J3-6
-7
PI2
PI3
Serial communication
Copier
J2
See p. 8-14.
-5
*Negative logic.
J114J202
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-4
C. Basic Operations
1. OutlineThe ADF uses two motors for picking up and delivering originals. The pickup motor (M2) is
used to pick up originals, and the belt motor (M1) is used to move, stop, and deliver originals.Further, the ADF is equipped with three sensors for monitoring the movement of originals.The ADF is designed to accommodate one-sided original copying mode only.
Figure 8-104
PI2
PI1
PI3
Bel
t mot
or
driv
e si
gnal
Pic
kup
mot
or
driv
e si
gnal
Regi
stra
tion
pape
r det
ectio
n sig
nal (
PDP2
) J5-
6
J5-9
J5-3
Pick
-up
pape
r det
ectio
n sig
nal (
PDP3
)
Deliv
ery
pape
r det
ectio
n sig
nal (
PDP1
)
ADF controller PCB
M1 M2
One-wayclutch
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-5
2. One-Sided Original ModeThe ADF picks up originals stacked on the original tray starting with the topmost original; after
it picks up an original, it places it on the copyboard glass for copying, moves it away from thecopyboard glass, and delivers it to the copyboard glass.
Figure 8-105
Placing originals
Picking up an original
Feeding 1
Feeding 2
Copying
Delivering
Original tray
Delivery tray Originals
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-6
D. Detecting an Original
1. OutlineThe ADF’s original detection mechanism has the following two functions:
1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of an OriginalChecks whether there is an original on the original tray.
2. Identifying the Length of the OriginalChecks the length of the original placed on the original tray.
3. Detecting the Presence/Absence of an OriginalThe original placement sensor (PI3) is used to check the presence/absence of an original.When an original is placed on the original tray, the original placement sensor (PI3) sends the
original detection signal (PDP3) to the ADF controller PCB in response to the movement of thedetecting lever away from the sensor.
Figure 8-106
Original tray
Original
ADF controller PCB
Orig
inal
det
ectio
n si
gnal
(P
DP
3)
PI3Detecting lever
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-7
2. Identifying the Length of the OriginalThe registration paper sensor (PI2) is used to identify the length of the original, if any.The ADF controller computes the length of the original based on the time it takes for the
original to move past the registration paper sensor (PI2).Using the result of the computation, the ADF controller determines whether the size of the
original is A4/LTR or smaller or LGL, thereby switching to the appropriate ADF operation.Table 8-101 shows the lengths of originals that determines ADF operation sequence.
Figure 8-107
Table 8-101
Original Lengths and Operation Sequences
Length~313cm314cm~
SequenceFor A4/LTR originalsFor LGL originals
PI2Original tray
Original
ADF controller PCB
Regi
stra
tion
pape
r de
tect
ion
signa
l (PD
P2) PI3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-8
E. Pickup Operation
1. OperationWhen an original is placed on the original tray and the Copy Start key is pressed, the following
sequence of operations takes place:1 Preparing for PickUp Operation
When an original is placed on the original tray, i.e., the original placement sensor (PI3) turnsON, the pickup roller rotates counterclockwise and the paper guide holds the original in place.
Figure 8-108
2 Pickup SeparationWhen the Copy Start key is pressed, the pickup roller 1 and 2 rotate clockwise, and pick up the
first original (topmost) and forward it as far as the registration roller. (The separation pad ensuresthat only one original is picked up.)
Figure 8-109
Original tray
1st original
PI3Paper guide
1st original
Separation pad
Pickup roller 1
Pickup roller 2
Registration roller
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-9
3 ArchingThe first original is butted against the registration roller so that it arches.
Figure 8-110
4 Feeding Operation 1The feeding belt is moved so that the leading edge of the first original comes into contact with
the delivery sensor (PI1). (In the case of a LGL original, the original is moved about 15 mm fartherafter it has come into contact with the delivery sensor.)
At the same time, the pickup motor (M2) is rotated counterclockwise to prepare for picking upthe second original.
Figure 8-111
Figure 8-112
1st originalArching
Registration roller
PI1
Delivery sensor
1st original Feeding belt
Original tray
2nd original
PI3Paper guide
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-10
5 Feeding 2The feeding belt is moved counterclockwise so that the first original is stopped at a specific
location on the copyboard glass.
Figure 8-113
6 Moving the Scanner and Picking Up the Second OriginalThe scanner starts to move forward after the original has been stopped at a specific location on
the copyboard glass.If the original is A4/LTR or smaller, the pickup motor (M2) is also rotated clockwise to pickup
the second original and butt it against the registration roller.If the original is LGL, the second original is picked up after the scanner has been moved for-
ward.
Figure 8-114
Feeding belt1st original
2nd originalScanner
1st original
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-11
2. Sequence of Pickup Operations (A4/LTR, 2 originals)
Figure 8-115
3. Sequence of Operations (LGL, 2 originals)
Figure 8-116
Original setCopy Start key ON
Preparing for pickup
Pickig up
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)
Original detection sensor (PI3)
Registration sensor (PI2)
Delivery sensor (PI1)
: motor CCW rotation
Picking up /separating
ArchingPreparing for pickup of 2nd original
Feeding 1 Feeding 2
CopyingPicking up 2nd original
Original setCopy Start key ON
Preparing for pickup
Pickig up
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)
Original detection sensor (PI3)
Registration sensor (PI2)
Delivery sensor (PI1)
: motor CCW rotation
Picking up /separating
ArchingPreparing for pickup of 2nd original
Feeding 1 Feeding 2
Copying
Feeding 15mm farther
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-12
F. Delivery
1. OperationsThe ADF operates as follows to deliver originals from the copyboard glass:
1 Delivery FeedingThe feeding belt is moved to feed and deliver the first original on the copyboard glass. At the
same time, the pickup motor (M2) moves the second original to the copyboard glass.
Figure 8-117
2 Delivering to the Delivery TrayThe ADF switches the belt motor to low speed as soon as the trailing edge of the original
moves past the delivery sensor (PI1), thereby delivering the original slowly.
Figure 8-118
2nd original
1st original
2nd original
Delivery sensor
1st original
Delivery tray
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-13
2. Sequence of Operations (A4/LTR, 2 originals)
Figure 8-119
3. Sequence of Operations (LGL, 2 originals)
Figure 8-120
Original setCopy Start key ON
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)
Original detection sensor (PI3)
Registration sensor (PI2)
Delivery sensor (PI1)
: motor CCW rotation
Picking up/separating 1st original
Copying,picking up/separating 2nd original
Delivering 1st original/picking up 2nd original
Copying Delivering
Detecting length
: motor low-speed rotation
Original setCopy Start key ON
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)Original detection sensor (PI3)
Registration sensor (PI2)
Delivery sensor (PI1)
: motor CCW rotation
Delivering 1st original,picking up/separating 2nd original
Copying Delivering
: motor low-speed rotation
Feeding farther 15mm
Copying
Feeding farther 15mmFeeding farther 15mm
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-14
G. Controlling the Pickup Motor
1. OutlineFigure 8-121 is a diagram of the control circuit for the pickup motor (M2).The pickup motor is a DC motor.The CPU (Q1) on the ADF controller PCB sends the motor drive signals PM0 and PM1 to the
motor driver (Q5). The pickup motor rotates clockwise or counterclockwise according to the com-binations of the states of these two signals. (Table 8-102 shows how the pickup motor rotates foreach combination.)
The motor driver is equipped with a limiter function, preventing overcurrent from flowing intothe motor. When an overcurrent occurs, the limiter function cuts off the motor drive current,thereby preventing damage to the motor.
When the limiter function is activated, the pickup motor cannot rotate as controlled, possiblyleading to pickup faults. Any pickup fault causes the ADF controller to flash the JAM indicator onthe copier and stop the pickup motor at the same time.
Figure 8-121
Table 8-102
+24V
Q1
CPUM2
PM1
PM0
Pickupmotor
ADF controller PCB
Q5Motordriver
PMRD1
PMRD1*
Pickup rollerrotationBraked
Picking upDelivering
At reset (free)
Motor drivesignal (PM0)
‘1’‘1’‘0’‘0’
Motor drivesignal (PM1)
‘1’‘0’‘1’‘0’
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-15
H. Controlling the Belt Motor
1. OutlineFigure 8-122 is a diagram showing the control circuit for the belt motor (M2).The belt motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor.The CPU (Q1) on the ADF controller PCB sends control pulse signals (A, A*, B, B*) to the
motor driver (Q4).In response, the motor driver changes the output timing of the pulse signals (MA, MA*, MB,
MB*) used for driving the motor to rotate the belt motor clockwise or counterclockwise.The motor driver is equipped with a limiter function used to keep the motor supplied with a
specific current so that current greater than specified will not flow.If loads large enough to activate the limiter function occur in succession, the belt motor cannot
rotate as specified, possibly leading to feeding faults. Any feeding fault will cause the ADF con-troller to flash the Jam indicator on the controller and stop the belt motor at the same time.
Figure 8-122
+24V
Q1
CPUM1
A
A*
B
B*
MA
MA*
MB
MB*
ADF controller PCB
Q4
Motor
driver
Belt motor
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-16
I. Detecting Original Jams
The ADF is equipped with three jam sensors (PI1 through PI3) as indicated in Figure 8-123 tomonitor the movement of originals.
The movement of originals are checked at such times as programmed in the CPU on the ADFcontroller PCB; a jam is identified in relation to the presence of an original at each sensor.
Table 8-103 describes the type of jam, condition of detection, and sensors involved.
Figure 8-123
Table 8-103
Type of Original Jam and Condition of Detection
PI2
PI1
PI3
PI3: original placement sensorPI1: delivery sensor PI2: registration sensor
ConditionsWhen the 1st original is separated, the deliverysensor (PI1) turns on while the belt motorrotates for 300 ms or less or before the registra-tion sensor (PI2) turns on.When the 1st original is picked up, the registra-tion sensor (PI2) and the delivery sensor (PI1)turn on.When separation starts, the registration sensor(PI2) or the delivery sensor (PI1) are on.When separation starts, the registration sensor(PI2) does not turn on after 2 sec.When pickup starts, the registration sensor (PI2)does not turn off after feeding the original forabout 500 mm.The ADF is opened while in operation.When delivery starts, the delivery sensor (PI1)does not detect an original that has been fedabout 100 mm.After the registration sensor (PI2) has turnedoff, the delivery sensor (PI1) does not detect anoriginal that has been fed for about 500 mm.During pickup, the delivery sensor (PI1) re-mains on even when the original is fed for‘length + about 60 mm’.
Operation
Pickup
Delivery
Type of jamResidual original
Original present at start
Separation delay
Pick-up delay
ADF openDelivery delay jam
Delivery stationary jam
SensorPI1,PI2
PI1,PI2
PI2
PI2
MS1PI1,PI2
PI1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-17
J. Power Supply
1. OutlineFigure 8-124 shows the routes of power supply.The ADF is supplied by the copier with 5 V and 24 V. The 24V supply is cut off when the ADF
is opened, i.e., when the ADF switch (MS1) turns off. The 5V supply will continue to keep eachsensor powered even when the ADF is opened.
Figure 8-124
Logic
Circuitbreaker(CB1)
Copier ADF controller PCB
Fuse resistor
(R1)
24V
5V J1-3
J1-1
J6-2
J6-1
CO
M
NO
Delivery sensor (PI1)
Belt motor (M1)
Pickup motor (M2)
ADF switch(MS1)
CompositepowersupplyPCB
J101-1
J101-3Registration sensor (PI2)
Original placement sensor (PI3)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800S/900S REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-18
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varis-
tors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)5. As necessary, cut the harness band.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-19
A. Removing the ADF
1) Open the machine’s top unit.2) Free the two claws [1], and slide the left
cover [2] to detach.
3) Remove the screw [3], and free the fourclaws [4]; then, the detach the rear cover[5].
4) Close the machine’s top unit.5) Remove the two screws [6], and remove
the fixing plate [7].
Figure 8-201
Figure 8-202
Figure 8-203
[1] [1][2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-20
Figure 8-204
Figure 8-205
[11]
[11]
6) Disconnect the two connectors [8], andremove the screw [9]; then, remove thecable bush [10].
7) Remove the two lockpin [11], and removethe ADF from the copier.
[8][10] [9]
[8]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-21
B. External Covers
Remove the covers as follows whencleaning, checking, or repairing the inside ofthe machine:1) Remove the ADF from the copier.
(See “A. Removing the ADF.”)2) Remove the feeding roller [1] from the
bushing [2].
[1] Upper cover [2] Lower cover
Figure 8-206
Figure 8-207
[1]
[2]
[1][2]
[1][2]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-22
3) Remove the six screws [3], and separatethe lower cover [4] from the upper cover[5].
4) Disconnect the connector [6], and removethe lower cover [4].
Figure 8-208
Figure 8-209
[3] [4]
[5]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[6]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-23
C. Drive System
1. Drive Unit1) Remove the lower cover.
(See “B. External Covers.”)2) Remove the screw [1] and the bushing [2];
then, remove the pickup roller cover [3].
3) Remove the E-ring [4], and remove thebearing [5].
Figure 8-210
Figure 8-211
[1]
[2][3]
[4][5]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-24
4) Remove the timing belt [6], and removethe feeding belt roller [7] by shifting it inthe direction of the arrow.
5) Remove the five screws [9], and removethe right hinge unit [8].
6) Remove the stop ring [10] (resin) and thebushing [11].
Figure 8-212
Figure 8-213
Figure 8-214
[6]
[7]
[9] [9][9]
[10]
[11]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-25
7) Disconnect the two connectors [12], andremove the five screws [13]; then, removethe drive unit [14].
Figure 8-215
[12]
[13] [14] [13]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-26
D. Feeding System
1. Pickup Roller1) Remove the drive unit [1].
(See “C.1. Drive Unit.”)
2) Remove the E-ring [2], and remove theshaft [3]; then, detach the pickup roller 1[4].
3) Remove the stop ring [5].
Figure 8-216
Figure 8-217
Figure 8-218
[1]
[5]
[2][3]
[4]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-27
4) Remove the two straight pins [6], and re-move the pickup roller 2 [8] while movingthe cover [7] in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 8-219
[6]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-28
2. Registration Roller1) Remove the lower cover.
(See “B. External Covers.”)2) Remove the link arm [1] from the registra-
tion roller shaft [2] by turning the linkarm.
3) While pushing the bushing [3] in the di-rection of the arrow, pull out the registra-tion roller shaft [2] slowly.
Figure 8-220
Figure 8-221
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-29
3. Feeding Belt1) Remove the lower cover.
(See “B. External Covers.”)2) Remove the two tension springs [1].
3) Remove the E-ring [2], and remove thebearing [3].
4) Remove the timing belt [4], and removethe feeding belt drive roller [5] by movingit in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 8-222
Figure 8-223
Figure 8-224
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-30
5) Remove the two equalizer spring [6] andthe two feeding belt rolls [7].
6) Remove the two screws [9], and removethe delivery sensor unit [8].
7) Remove the stop ring [10] (made ofresin); then, remove the bushing [11].
Figure 8-225
Figure 8-226
Figure 8-227
[6]
[7]
[6][7]
[8][9]
[10] [11]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-31
8) Remove the screw [12], and remove thegrounding wire [13]; then, remove the de-livery roller unit [14] by moving it in thedirection of the arrow.
9) Remove the screw [15], and remove thestatic eliminating brush [16].
10) Remove the two E-rings [17]; then, re-move the timing belt [18], gear [19], andtwo bushings [20].
Figure 8-228
Figure 8-229
Figure 8-230
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15][16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[20]
[17]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)8-32
11) Pull out the actuator [21] in the directionof the arrow; then, remove the feeding beltlink roller [22], and remove the feedingbelt [23].
Figure 8-231
[21][22]
[23]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 8 ADF
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-33
E. Electrical System
1. ADF Controller PCB1) Remove the lower cover.
(See “B. External Covers.”)2) Disconnect the five connectors [1], and
remove the two screws [2]; then, removethe ADF controller PCB [3].
2. Original Placement Sensor andRegistration Paper Sensor
Pay attention to the colors of the cablesand connectors when connecting the connec-tors of the original placement sensor and theregistration paper sensor.
Table 8-201
Figure 8-232
Figure 8-233
[1]
[2][3]
[2]
[1]
Original placement sensor
Registrationpaper sensor
Sensor
Original placement sensorRegistration paper sensor
Cable color
PurpleYellow
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9
INSTALLATION
I. SELECTING A SITE ....................9-1II. UNPACKING AND
INSTALLATION ............................9-2A. Unpacking and Installation ....9-2
B. Placing Copy Paper...............9-9III. MOVING THE MACHINE .......... 9-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-1
I. SELECTING A SITE
Keep the following in mind when selecting a site for installation; if possible, visit the user’sbefore delivery of the machine:
• The site offers a power outlet whose rating is as specified (±10%) and which may be usedexclusively for the machine.
• The site is between 7.5°C/45.5°F and 32.5°C/90.5°F in temperature and between 5% and85% in humidity. Avoid an area near water faucets, water boilers, humidifiers, and refrigera-tors.
• Avoid areas near sources of fire. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas or direct raysof the sun. (As necessary, provide curtains.)
• The site must be well ventilated.The level of ozone generated by the machine should not affect the health of people around it.Some, however, may find the odor to be rather unpleasant, and ventilation is a very importantfactor.
• The floor of the site must ensure that the machine’s feet will remain in contact, and will holdthe machine level.
• The machine must be at least 10 cm/3.9 in. away from any wall, and there must be adequatespace for work involving the machine.
Figure 9-101
10cm min.
10cm min.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)9-2
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
When a piece of metal is brought in from a cold to warm place, droplets of water tend to formon its surface. This phenomenon is known as “condensation” and, in copiers, can cause blankcopies.
If the machine has been brought in from a cold place, leave it alone at least for one hour beforestarting to install it.
A. Unpacking and Installation
Take out the copier and the attachments fromthe shipping box, and check to make sure thatnone is missing:
1 • Cassette• Copy tray• Power cord• ADF auxiliary tray (ADF type only)• User's Manual• Manual feed tray (for some areas only)• Language label for cassette (included with
universal cassette)• Language label for ADF (ADF type only)
Remove the packaging bag and all fixing tape.2
Remove the shipping attachment [1] (gold-colored screw) from the left of the machine.
3
Shipping attachment [1]
You will be storing the shipping attachment[1] inside the machine in step 9.
Work Checks and remarksStep
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-3
Work Checks and remarksStepRemove the shipping attachment [2] (blackscrew) from the right side of the machine.
4
Shipping attachment [2]
You will be storing the shipping attachment[2] inside the machine in step 9.
Take out the protective member from themanual feed tray. (Multifeeder type only)
Caution:This step applies only if the manual feed trayis attached.
5Protective member
Attach the manual feed tray that comes withthe machine. (Multifeeder type only)
Caution:This applies only if the manual feed traycomes packaged with the machine.
Manual feed tray
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)9-4
Work Checks and remarksStepOpen the copyboard cover, and remove theprotective sheet. (Copyboard type only)
Caution:If the protective sheet is not fond on the ma-chine, go to the next step.
6
Protective sheet
Open the ADF, and remove the protectivemembers. (ADF type only)
Caution:You will need this protective member whenrelocating the machine. Be sure to store itaway appropriately.
Protective members
Pull the open/close lever found on the left ofthe machine to open the machine’s top unit;then, remove the two protective members.
Caution:If the protective member is not found on themachine, go to the next step.
7Open/close lever
Protective member
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-5
Work Checks and remarksStep
Pick the fixing member from the bottom of thetop unit, and detach it.
8
Store the shipping attachments [1] and [2] re-moved in steps 3 and 4 in the machine’s bot-tom unit.
9
[1]
[2]
Hold the tab of the cartridge, and take it out ofthe machine.
10
Holding the cartridge with the warning labelfacing up, shake it several times in both direc-tions (90°).
11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)9-6
Work Checks and remarksStep
Place the cartridge on a level place, and pulloff the open seal.Holding the tab, pull it straight out in the di-rection of the arrow.
Caution:The seal can tear in the middle. Do no pull it atan angle.
12
Hold the cartridge with the waning label fac-ing up, and insert it into the machine with careuntil it stops.
13
Push on the marking found on the top of themachine to close it fully.
14
Original tray
Open the original tray.
Caution:This step applies to the ADF type only.
15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-7
Work Checks and remarksStep
While bending the ADF auxiliary tray in thedirection of arrows in the figure, insert it intothe holes on the edge of the original tray.
16Holes
ADF auxiliary tray
Slide in and out the auxiliary tray severaltimes to make sure that it moves smoothly.
17ADF auxiliary tray
Connect the power cord to the power cordconnector.
18
Connect the power plug to the power outlet;then, turn on the power switch.
19 • Make sure that the AE and DIRECT indica-tors turn on, the count/ratio indicator indi-cates ‘1’.
• Press the Count/Zoom Set key and theClear/Stop key to check that the copy countis correct.
• Press the Default Ratio key to check thatdifferent ratios are indicated.
• Check to make sure that a press on theZoom Mode key turns on the ‘0’ indicationand a press on the Count/Zoom Set key willindicate the correct ratio.
Caution:This step applies to the ADF type only.
Caution:This step applies to the ADF type only.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)9-8
Work Checks and remarksStep
Attach the copy tray.20
Check to make sure that the three grooves inthe copy tray are all in place.
Place copy paper inside the cassette. (Forhow, see B. “Placing Copy Paper.”)
21
All notations on the label attached to the ADFis in English. If a non-English language isneeded, select the appropriate label fromamong those that come with the machine andstick it.
22
Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard glass,and make copies to see if the operation is cor-rect.
23 • Check to make sure that there is no abnor-mal noise.
• Check to make sure that as many copies asspecified are made correctly.
Clean the externals of the machine and thearea around the machine.
24
Caution:This step applies to the ADF type only.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-9
Work Checks and remarksStep
B. Placing Copy Paper
1. Universal Cassette
Take out the cassette from the machine, andremove the protective members and the label.Remove the rear guide plate as shown, andmount it back to suit the size of the copy paperto be used.
1Rear end guide plate
Shift down, and pull off
Turn the fixing lever (front, rear) of the sidepaper guide plate as shown, and unlock theside paper guide plate.
2Fixing lever (rear)
Fixing lever (front)
Slide the side paper guide plate to suit thewidth of the copy paper to be used; then, turnthe fixing lever as shown to lock the side pa-per guide plate in place.
3Side paper guide plate (rear)
Side paper guide plate (front)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)9-10
Work Checks and remarksStep
Place copy paper in the cassette, and set thecassette into the machine.
4
All text on the label attached to the cassette isEnglish. If you need to replace it with a non-English label, select the appropriate one fromamong those packaged with the machine, andattach it.
5
Language label for cassette
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-11
Work Checks and remarksStep
2. 250-Sheet/500-Sheet Cassette
Take out the cassette from the machine, andremove the protective member.
1
Slide the rear end paper guide plate as shownto match the size of the paper to be used.
Caution:This step applies to the 500-sheet cassette(LTR/LGL) only.
2
Rear end guide plate
Place copy paper in the cassette; then, set thecassette in the machine.
3
• 500-sheet cassette
• 250-sheet cassette
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)9-12
III. MOVING THE MACHINE
If you need to move the machine by truck or any other means of transportation after installa-tion, be sure to perform the following:
Work Checks and remarksStep
Turn on the power, and press the Default Ra-tio key to select 70%.
1
Press the Paper Select key to select the manualfeed tray; then, press the Copy Start key with-out placing any paper on the manual feed tray.
2 The count/ratio indicator will indicate ' '.
Turn off the power switch, and disconnect thepower plug from the outlet.
3
Pull the open/close lever found on the left ofthe machine, and open the machine’s top unit.
4
Take out the shipping attachments [1] and [2]stored in the machine’s bottom unit.
5
[1]
[2]
Detach the copy tray.6
Press down on the marking on themachine's top unit to fully close the machine.
7
Caution:Before starting the following work, check to make sure that the machines is not too hot. If it is, asimmediately after continuous copying, you may not be able to carry out step 8, in which theshipping attachment is replaced.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-13
Work Checks and remarksStep
Fit the shipping attachments [1] and [2] de-tached in step 5 back to the machine.
8
Shipping attachment [1]
Shipping attachment [2]
Tape the machine's top unit in place to preventit from opening.
9
Place A4/LGL copy paper on the copyboardglass, and close the copyboard cover; then,tape it in place. (Copyboard type only)
10
Raise the ADF. Then, place two parts used aspackaging so that they fit closely around bothsides and the front of the ADF, as shown in thediagram, and secure them with tape. (ADFtype only)
Gently lower the ADF and secure the mainunit by taping in eight places, as shown in thediagram. (ADF type only)Pack the machine, using the original packingmaterial and box.Or tape the machine’s top in place so that itwill not open while in transit.
11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACEDPARTS ....................................... 10-1
II. DURABLES ANDCONSUMABLES ...................... 10-1
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING ....... 10-1IV. STORING AND HANDLING
THE CARTRIDGE ..................... 10-2
A. Storing the Cartridge with thePackaging Seal Intact ........ 10-2
B. Storing and Handling theCartridge with the PackagingSeal Removed .................... 10-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-1
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS
The machine does not have parts which must be replaced on a periodical basis.
II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES
The machine does not have items designated as durables or consumables.
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING
The machine does not have any parts which require scheduled servicing.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)10-2
IV. STORING AND HANDLING THE CARTRIDGE
The cartridge is subject to the effects of the environment whether its packing seal is intact orremoved or whether it is inside the machine or otherwise, changing over time regardless of thenumber of copies made. The degree of change is highly dependent on the site of installation andhow it is maintained, and no general rule may be drawn; however, it is important to exercise carewhen storing or handling it.
A. Storing the Cartridge with the Packaging Seal Intact
If you are storing the cartridge in a warehouse or workshop, be sure that the environment is asindicated in Table 10-401; in addition, keep the following in mind:
• Avoid direct rays of the sun.• Avoid vibration.• Do not subject it to impact (as by hitting or dropping it).
Table 10-401 Temperature/Humidity Conditions for Storage
Temperaturebetween -20°C/-4°F and 40°C/104°F
Humidity90% or less
between 0°C/32°F and 35°C/95°F
between 35°C/95°F and 45°C/113°F
between -20°C/-4°F and 0°C/32°F
from 40°C/104°F to 15°C/59°Ffrom -20°C/-4°F to 25°C/77°F
between 35% and 85% RH
between 85% and 95% RH
between 10% and 35% RH
between 613.3 and 1013.3(hPa; 0.6 to 1 atm)
Te
mp
era
ture Normal (9/10 of entire storage period)
Harsh (1/10 of entire storage period)
Temperature changes (within 3-min period; approx.)
Normal (9/10 of entire storage period)
Harsh (1/10 of entire storage period)
Atmospheric pressure
High temperature
Low temperature
Hu
mid
ity
High humidity
Low humidity
Table 10-402 Conditions for Transportation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-3
B. Storing and Handling the Cartridge with the Packaging SealRemoved
The photosensitive medium is an organic photoconducting (OPC) material, which would dete-riorate if subjected to storing light.
The cartridge also holds toner, requiring the user to exercise care when storing or handling it.(Be sure that the user stores it in an appropriate storage box for storage.)
1. Storage after Removing the Packaging Seala. Avoid areas subject to the direct rays of the sun, i.e., near a window. Do not keep it in a car for
a long time, as it will be subjected to an extremely high temperature. (This applies even if thecartridge is inside a protective box.)
b. Avoid areas subjected to high or low temperature/humidity or where temperature or humiditytends to change abruptly (e.g., near an air conditioner).
c. Avoid areas subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent.d. Make sure that the cartridge is stored at 40°C/104°F or lower.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)10-4
2. Handling the Cartridgea. Before setting the cartridge in the machine or if copies have white spots as when it starts to run
out of toner, hold the cartridge level and shake it about 90° several times as shown in Figure 10-401 to even out the toner inside.If you shake it in a different way, the toner can spill out of the developing assembly or thecleaning assembly.
Figure 10-401
b. Do not place the cartridge on its end or turn it over as shown in Figure 10-402.
Figure 10-402
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-5
c. Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum as by opening the shutter for the photosen-sitive drum cover found at the bottom of the cartridge.(If you have soiled the surface of the photosensitive drum, wipe it with a flannel cloth coatedwith toner. Do not clean it using solvents.)
d. Do not disassemble the cartridge.
e. Do not subject the cartridge to excess vibration or impact. In particular, do not impose force onthe shutter for the photosensitive drum shutter.
f. Make sure that it is out of reach of children.
g. The photosensitive drum is susceptible to strong light, and the light-blocking shutter is pro-vided as a means of protection.If the drum is exposed to strong light for a long time, however, copies can start to show whitespots or vertical bands. Try leaving the machine alone as long as possible if such a problem isnoted; the memory (i.e., cause of white spots or vertical bands), however, may not disappear.Keep the following in mind:
Caution:1. Try to work briskly when removing a jam or replacing the cartridge.2. If the cartridge must be taken out of the machine for storage, be sure to put it in a protective
box or put a cover over it. Do not leave it outside the machine unprotected.
Reference:If the photosensitive drum is exposed to light of 1500 lux (general lighting) for 5 min and thenleft alone in a dark place for 5 min, it should recover so that it will not cause practical prob-lems. Nevertheless, avoid direct sunshine. (The rays of the sun is as strong as 10000 and30000 lux.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11
TROUBLESHOOTING
I. MAINTENANCE ANDINSPECTION ............................ 11-3A. Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure ........................... 11-3B. Points to Note for
Servicing ............................ 11-4II. STANDARDS AND
ADJUSTMENTS ....................... 11-5A. Mechanical ......................... 11-5B. ADF .................................. 11-30C. Electrical ........................... 11-41
III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGEFAULTS ................................... 11-48A. Making Initial Checks ....... 11-48B. Sample Image Faults ....... 11-52C. Troubleshooting Image
Faults ................................ 11-53IV. TROUBLESHOOTING
MALFUNCTIONS.................... 11-61
A. TroubleshootingMalfunctions ..................... 11-61
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDINGPROBLEMS ............................ 11-75A. Copy Paper Jam ............... 11-75B. Faulty Feeding .................. 11-78
VI. ARRANGEMENT ANDFUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICALPARTS ..................................... 11-79A. Sensors and Solenoids .... 11-79B. Switches ........................... 11-80C. Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc. 11-81D. PCBs ................................ 11-82E. ADF .................................. 11-83F. Variable Resistors (VR) and
Check Pins by PCB .......... 11-84VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS .................. 11-86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-1
Guide to the Troubleshooting Procedure
This chapter provides troubleshooting instructions in the form of tables prepared based ongenerally found flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to use them:
AC power is absent.
YES/NONO
NO
NO
YES
CausePower plug
Covers
Power source
---------------
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksIs the power plug connected to thepower outlet?Are the front door and delivery coverclosed fully?Is the rated voltage found at the poweroutlet?Is the rated voltage present between J1-1 and -2? (J1 is found near the powercord mount.)
ActionConnect the plug.
Close the door or thecover.Inform the user that
Go to step 6.
(Rest omitted.)
• To find out the cause (possible fault) of a specific problem, see the "Cause" column.If the problem is “AC power is absent,” you may suspect that the power plug is disconnected,covers are not closed fully, or power is absent at the main source.
• If you want to find out the checks to make or action to take, go through the steps: answer thequestions under “Checks”; if yes, take the action shown. Otherwise, go to the next step andmake the indicated checks.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-2
• Often, you will find the following instructions when checking the voltage using a meter: “mea-sure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and -2 (-) on the DC controller PCB.” The symbol “+”indicates the terminal to which you are expected to connect the positive probe of the meter and“-,” the negative probe.
example:J109-1 (+) ..... Connect the positive probe.J109-2 (-) ...... Connect the negative probe.
Is the power plug connected to the
power outlet?
Are the front door and the delivery cover
closed firmly?
Is the rated voltage present at the
power source?
Connect the plug.
Close the door or the cover.
Advise the user that the problem is not the copier's.
<Checks><Step>
1
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
Rest omitted.
2
3
<YES/NO> <Action>
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
11-3COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
Making Pre-Checks Adjusting the Optimum Density
Clean the parts.
Is the copy density correction switch (SW101) set
to the middle index? (Note 1)
Set it at the middle.
Select non-AE, and set the copy density adjusting lever to the middle index; then, make two to three copies of the Test Sheet (NA-3).
Check the following:1. Density of gray scale No. 92. Presence/absence of difference between front
and rear (Note 2)3. Density of gray scale No. 1 (good or bad; Note 2)4. Fogging of background (Note 2)
NO
YES
Scanning system, pickup/feeding system, delivery assembly
Check the following:1. Cartridge2. Scanning lamp3. AE sensor PCB4. DC controller PCB5. Composite power supply PCB (See the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.)
Is the optimum density obtained by intensity
adjustment? (Note 3)
Can the deviation be corrected
using the copy density correction switch (SW101)?
(Note 1)
Is gray scale No. 9 barely visible?
END
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
Note:1. Applies only if the machine is equipped with a copy
density correction switch (SW101).2. The machine is not equipped with a function to
correct image faults. See the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
3. See p. 11-42.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
11-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
B. Points to Note for Servicing
Copyboard cover
Item Tools/solvent Work/remarks
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Reflecting plateNo. 1 through No. 6 mirror
Alcohol
Alcohol
Lint-free paper
Blower brush
Cleaning.
Cleaning.
Dry wiping.
If dirt cannot be removed, dry-wiping with lint-free paper.
Lens Blower brush Cleaning.
Inlet guide
Item Tools/solvent Work/remarks
Solvent Cleaning.
Drum cover shutter
Item Tools/solvents Work/remarks
Most cloth Cleaning; be sure to remove all toner to prevent toner soiling images.
Single-feeder pickup roller
Item Tools/solvents Work/remarks
Multifeeder, Pickup roller
Cassette pickup roller
Registration roller
Transfer guide
Moist cloth
Moist cloth
Cleaning.
Cleaning.
Cleaning.
Transfer charging roller
Static eliminator
Feed belt
Lint-free paper
Special brush
Moist cloth
Cleaning.
Cleaning.
Cleaning.
Cleaning.
Moist cloth or alcohol
Moist cloth or alcohol
Moist cloth or alcohol
Cleaning. Do not use water or solvent. Take care not to touch it or leave solvent or oil.
Copyboard, Scanner
Feeding belt
Item Tool/solvent
Separation pad
Cloth moistened with water*
Cloth
Dry-wiping.
Cleaning.
Pickup roller Cloth moistened with water* or alcohol
Cleaning.
ADF
Fixing Assembly, Delivery Assembly Pickup, Feeding, and Transfer Assemblies and Static Eliminator
Cartridge
Work/remarks
*Be sure to wring it well.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-5
II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Mechanical
1. Copiera. Leading Edge Non-Image Width
Make adjustments so that the leading edge non-image width is 2.0 ±1.5 mm when the TestSheet is copied in Direct.
Caution:If you have performed this adjustment, be sure to adjust the image leading edge margin.
Figure 11-201
1) Turn VR105 on the DC controller PCB so that the width is as indicated.
Figure 11-202
Table 11-201
Turing VR105 and Leading Edge Non-Image Width
Direction of VR105Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Leading edge non-image widthDecreasesIncreases
2.0 ± 1.5mm
VR105
J102
J101
J107
J101
J131
VR103VR102 J103
J130 J114
J104
J105 J109
J106
J102
VR104VR105VR106
VR107
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-6
b. Image Leading Edge Margin (registration activation timing)Make adjustments so that the leading edge margin is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet is
copied.
Caution:Be sure to check that the leading edge non-image width is as indicated before performing thisadjustment.
Figure 11-203
1) Turn VR104 on the DC controller PCB so that the margin is as indicated.
Figure 11-204
Table 11-202
Direction of VR104Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Image leading edge marginIncreasesDecreases
Turing VR104 and Image Leading Edge Margin
2.5 ± 1.5mm
VR104
J102
J101
J107
J101
J131
VR103VR102 J103
J130 J114
J104
J105 J109
J106
J102
VR104VR105VR106
VR107
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-7
c. Adjusting the Mirror Position (optical length between No. 1 mirror and No. 2 mirror)If you have replaced the scanner drive cable, you must adjust the mirror position, by changing
the position of the cable retainer of the No. 1 mirror mount.
Reference:1. As more and more copies are made, the cable tends to become slack, requiring adjustment.2. If the optical length between the No. 1 mirror and the No. 2 mirror is not correct, the horizontal
reproduction ratio will be wrong, causing poor sharpness or blurred images.
1) Fit the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009) as shown.
Figure 11-205
2) Remove the copyboard glass. (See Chapter 7.III.C.1. “Removing the Copyboard Glass”.)3) Loosen the screws used to secure the cable retainer at the rear and the front of the No. 1 mirror
mount [1].
Figure 11-206
[1]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-8
4) Turn the cable drive pulley [3] so that the three shafts [2] of the mirror positioning tool for the frontand the rear may be arranged as shown.
Figure 11-207 (rear)
Figure 11-208 (front)
[3][2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-9
5) While keeping the condition of 4), tighten the positioning screw at the rear and the front of the No.1 mirror mount [1].
Figure 11-209 (rear)
Figure 11-210 (front)
[1]
[1]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-10
d. Checking the Force of the Cassette SpringIf the force of the spring used to hold up the holding plate of the cassette is not correct, pickup
faults or the like can occur.If a fault is suspected, check the force of the spring using a spring gauge (CK-0054), and
replace the spring if it is not as indicated:Standard: 970 ±150 g
Making MeasurementsPush the spring gauge against the middle of the spring as shown, and check to make sure that
the reading of the spring gauge is 970 ±150 g when the holding plate is 18 mm away from thebottom of the cassette.
Figure 11-211
Spring gauge(CK-0054)
Holding plate
18m
m
Cassette spring Cassette
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-11
e-1. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable
Figure 11-212
Wind 1.5 times. (black cable)Wind 7.5 times. (silver-colored cable)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-12
e-2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable
1. Before Starting the Work
Prepare the following:• Mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009)• Cable clip (FY9-3017)• Adhesive tape
1) Set the mirror positioning tool as shown.
Figure 11-213
2) Prepare about five strips of adhesive tape (each one about 20 × 50 mm).3) Remove the copyboard glass. (See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the Copyboard Glass.”)4) Disconnect the connectors (J101, J131) [1] from the DC controller PCB.
Figure 11-214
[1]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-13
5) If the machine is equipped with an ADF, free the hook [2], and disconnect the two relay connec-tors [3] from the left upper stay [4].
Figure 11-215
6) Remove the three screws [5], and detach the left upper stay [4].
Figure 11-216
[2][2]
[2] [2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[4][5]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-14
7) Remove the four screws [7], and detach the lens cover [8].
Figure 11-217
[7] [7]
[8]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-15
2. Routing the Reversing Cable
1) Wind the reversing cables (silver-colored) [2] on the cable drive pulley [1] 7.5 times with thelonger of the two on top; then, secure it in position with a cable clip [3].
Figure 11-218
Figure 11-219
[2]
Shorter end
Longer end
[1]
Face with a marking
[1]
[3]
Top view
[3]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-16
2) Put the cable drive pulley [1] into the shaft [4], and secure it in position with an E-ring [5].When putting the cable drive pulley into the shaft, be sure that the hook is at the front.
Figure 11-220
3) Hook the shorter end [6] on the pulley [7].
Figure 11-221
[5]
Hook
(front)
[1]
[4]
[7]
[6]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-17
4) Lead the shorter end [6] under the No. 1 mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror mount [9]; then,hook it on the left rear pulley [10] and the pulley [11] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount.
Figure 11-222
5) After fitting the shorter end [6] on the cable hook [12], secure its end with adhesive tape [13].Be sure that the secured end of the cable is found where the hole in the left side plate and the tipof the cable matches.
Figure 11-223
[10]
[11]
[6]
[8]
[9]
[6]
[12][13]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-18
6) Lead the longer end [14] along the cable drive pulley, and hook it on the pulley [15] on the rightfront side.
Figure 11-224
7) Lead the longer end [14] under the No. 1 mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror mount [9];then, hook it on the pulley [16] on the left front side and the pulley [17] of the No. 2/3 mirrormount.
Figure 11-225
[14]
[15]
[1]
[8]
[17]
[9]
[16][14]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-19
8) Hook the longer cable [14] on the cable hook [18]; then, secure its end to the left side withadhesive tape [19].Be sure that the secured end of the cable is found where the hole in the left side plate and the tipof the cable matches.
Figure 11-226
[18] [19]
[14]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-20
3. Routing the Forwarding Cable
1) Fit the longer end forwarding cable (black) [2] on the top hook of the cable drive pulley [1], andwind it 1.5 times. Then, secure the shorter end [3] as shown with adhesive tape [4].
Figure 11-227
2) Lead the longer end [5] along the cable drive pulley [1] as shown, and hook it on the pulley [6]on the right front side.
Figure 11-228
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Face without a marking
[5]
[6]
[1]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-21
3) Lead the longer end [5] under the No. 1 mirror mount [7]; then, hook it on the pulley [8] of the No.2/3 mirror mount, and lead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7] and the scanning lamp [9].
Figure 11-229
4) Hook the end of the longer end [5] on the hole [10] on the right side.
Figure 11-230
[5]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[5]
[10]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-22
5) Free the shorter end [3], and hook it on the pulley [11] on the right rear side.
Figure 11-231
6) Lead the shorter end [3] under the No. 1 mirror mount [7], and hook it on the pulley [12] of theNo. 2/3 mirror mount as shown; then, lead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7] and thescanning lamp [9].
Figure 11-232
[11]
[3]
[7]
[9]
[3]
[12]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-23
7) Hook the end of the shorter end [3] on the hole [13] on the right side.
Figure 11-233
8) Free the shorter end [3] and the longer end [5] (reversing cable), and connect both with a spring[14]; then, fit the stopper [15].
Figure 11-234
[3] [13]
[14][3]
[15]
[5]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-24
9) Detach the pulley clip [16] from the cable drive pulley [1].
Figure 11-235
[1] [16]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-25
4. Positioning the No. 1 Mirror Mount
1) Fix the rear and the front of the No. 1 mirror mount [1] temporarily to the metal fixing [2] of theforwarding cable.
Figure 11-236 (rear)
Figure 11-237 (front)
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-26
2) Turn the cable drive pulley [4] so that the three shafts [3] of the mirror positioning tool for rear andfront is as shown.
Figure 11-238 (rear)
Figure 11-239 (front)
[4][3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-27
3) While keeping the condition of step 2), tighten the positioning screw on the rear and front of theNo. 1 mirror mount [1].
Figure 11-240 (rear)
Figure 11-241 (front)
[1]
[1]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-28
f. Point to Note When Mounting the Scanning LampWhen mounting the scanning lamp, be sure that its logo mark (manufacturer’s name) is toward
the front. Further, be sure that the protrusion near its middle is as shown.
Figure 11-242
Caution:• If you have replaced the scanning lamp, you must adjust the intensity of the lamp (p. 11-42)
and perform AE adjustment.• Do not touch the lamp when handling it.
Logo mark
Scanning lamp
45˚ (approx.)
(mirror mount moving in reverse)
(front)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-29
g. Points to Note When Mounting the FuseWhen mounting the thermal fuse of the No. 1 mirror mount, be sure that the fuse is oriented as
shown.Make sure that the fuse is in contact with the reflecting plate.
Figure 11-243
(front)
Thermal fuse
Reflecting plate
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-30
B. ADF
1. Adjusting the Original Stop PositionAdjust the original stop position in the following order:
1. Correcting original skew2. Adjusting the rear/front original stop position3. Adjusting the original leading edge stop position
2. Correcting Original Skew1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.
• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.
Figure 11-244
2) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.
Figure 11-245
10mm
10m
m
A4/LTR copy papper
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-31
3) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.4) Check to make sure that the difference between L1 and L2 on the copy is 1.8 mm (standard) or
less.
Figure 11-246
5) If the difference is not as specified, turn the adjusting screw found to the side of the left hingeunit to make adjustments.
Figure 11-247
Relationship between Adjusting Screw and L1/L2
Table 11-203
Direction of turnClockwise
Counterclockwise
Relationship between L1 and L2L1 > L2L1 < L2
Copy image
L1 L2
280mm
L1-L2=0 ± 1.8mm
Adjusting screw
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-32
3. Adjusting the Rear/Front Original Stop PositionYou must first correct original skew before adjusting the rear/front original stop position.
1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.
Figure 11-248
2) Remove the original tray cover from below the original tray.
Figure 11-249
10mm
10m
mA4/LTR copy papper
Originaltray cover
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-33
3) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.
Figure 11-250
4) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.5) Check to make sure that the distance L3 on the copy image indicated is 10 ±2.5 mm (standard)
or less.
Figure 11-251
Copy image
L3
L3=10 ± 2.5mm
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-34
6) If the distance is not as specified, loosen the pinion gear positioning screw under the originaltray, and adjust the position of the pinion gear.
Figure 11-252
Relationship between Pinion Gear Position and L3
Table 11-204
Direction of pinion gearAB
L3IncreasesDecreases
Pinion gear positioningscrew
Pinion gear
A
B
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-35
4. Adjusting the Original Leading Edge Stop PositionYou must first correct original skew and adjust the rear/front original stop position before
adjusting the original leading edge stop position.1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.
• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.
Figure 11-253
2) Remove the screw, and remove the ADF controller cover.
Figure 11-254
10mm
10m
m
A4/LTR copy papper
ADF controller coverScrew
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-36
3) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.
Figure 11-255
4) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.5) Check to make sure that the distance L4 on the copy image indicated is 10 +2.0, -2.5 mm
(standard) or less.
Figure 11-256
Copy image
L4
L4=10 ± 2.0mm
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-37
6) If the distance is not as specified, shift bit 1 of the DIP switch (SW1) on the ADF controllerPCB to ON, and place an A4 or LTR white copy paper on the original tray.
Figure 11-257
7) Press the push switch (PSW) on the ADF controller PCB.• The copy paper will be picked up from the original tray and stopped on the copyboard glass.
Figure 11-258
0FE
DC
B A 9 8 765
43
21ON
1 2
ON
1 2
SW1
0FE
DC
B A 9 8 765
43
21ON
1 2
PSW
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-38
8) Use the rotary switch (SW2) on the ADF controller PCB to adjust the original leading edgestop position.Moving the rotary switch by a single notch changes the original stop position by about 0.3 mm.Press the push switch (PSW) after deciding on a position to discharge the copy paper and storethe optimum value.
Figure 11-259
Relationship between Rotary Switch Direction and Original Position
Table 11-205
Position (shift) of originalToward leading edgeToward trailing edge
Direction of rotary switchClockwise
Counterclockwise
0FE
DC
B A 9 765
43
21ON
1 2
PSW
SW2
8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-39
Example:If L4 is 13 mm,You must shift the original stop position toward the leading edge by 3 mm.
1) Place a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper on the original tray.2) Shift bit 1 of the DIP switch (SW1) on the ADF controller PCB to ON; then, push the push
switch (PSW) to pick up the copy paper.
Figure 11-260
3) Turn the rotary switch (SW2) on the ADF controller PCB clockwise by 10 notches.
Figure 11-261
0FE
DC
B A 9 8 765
43
21ON
1 2
ON
1 2
SW1
0FE
DC
B A 9 76
54
3
21ON
1 2
SW2
8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-40
4) Press the push switch (PSW) on the ADF controller PCB.• The copy paper on the copyboard will be discharged, and the optimum value will be stored.
Figure 11-262
0FE
DC
B A 9 8 765
43
21ON
1 2
PSW
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-41
C. Electrical
1. After Replacing the Major Parts
*1: If you have replaced the composite power supply PCB, check copy images using the TestSheet; if (and only if) an image fault is found, adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp andexecute AE adjustment.
Table 11-206
Adjustment1. Intensity of the scanning lamp2. AE mechanism
1. AE mechanism
(1. Intensity of the scanning lamp)(2. AE mechanism)
1. Intensity of the scanning lamp2. AE mechanism3. Leading edge non-image width4. Image leading edge margin5. Reproduction ratio (fine adjustment)
1. Excute original leading edge stop position ad-justment
PartsScanning lamp
AE sensor PCB
Composite power supplyPCB*1
DC controller PCB
ADF controller PCB
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-42
2. Adjusting the Intensity of the Scanning LampAdjust the intensity of the scanning lamp if you have replaced any of the following:• DC controller PCB• Composite power supply PCB (See p.11-41.)• Scanning lamp
Caution:If you have performed this adjustment, you must always perform AE adjustment.
Making Adjustments1) Set a cartridge in the machine.2) Set the density correction switch (SW101) to its middle index.
Figure 11-263
3) Turn off the AE mechanism, and set the copy density adjusting lever on the control panel to itsmiddle index.
4) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard, and make a copy.5) Turn VR107 on the DC controller PCB gradually until gray scale No. 9 is barely visible.
Figure 11-264
Table 11-207
VR107 and Copy Density
Direction of VR107Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Copy densityLighterDarker
SW101
VR107
J102
J101
J107
J101
J131
VR103VR102 J103
J130 J114
J104
J105 J109
J106
J102
VR104VR105VR106
VR107
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-43
3. AE AdjustmentPerform this adjustment if you have replaced any of the following:• DC controller PCB• Composite power supply PCB (See p.11-41.)• AE sensor PCB• Scanning lamp
Making AdjustmentsBefore Starting the Work• Obtain a newspaper with more or less even print. (Avoid ones with many photos or large
display text.)• Obtain five sheets of white sheets of paper.• Be sure that the intensity of the scanning lamp has been adjusted when you have replaced the
scanning lamp.• Set the density correction switch (SW101) to the middle setting. If the machine is not
equipped with a density correction switch, set the density adjusting lever to the middle set-ting.
1) Short JP103 and JP104 on the DC controller PCB.
Figure 11-265
2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power.• The scanning lamp will turn on, and the main motor (M1) will rotate.
3) Stop shorting JP103 and JP104.
JP104 JP103
SERVICE
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-44
4) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB fully clockwise.
Figure 11-266
5) Place a newspaper on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.6) Turn VR102 so that the display indicates ‘A3’ to ‘Ad’.
Figure 11-267
7) Remove the newspaper from the copyboard, and place five sheets of copy paper in its place;then, close the copyboard cover.
8) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB so that the display will indicate ‘52’ to ‘5c’.
Figure 11-268
VR103
J102
J101
J107
J101
J131
VR103VR102 J103
J130 J114
J104
J105 J109
J106
J102
VR104VR105VR106
VR107
VR102
J102
J101
J107
J101
J131
VR103VR102 J103
J130 J114
J104
J105 J109
J106
J102
VR104VR105VR106
VR107
VR103
J102
J101
J107
J101
J131
VR103VR102 J103
J130 J114
J104
J105 J109
J106
J102
VR104VR105VR106
VR107
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-45
9) Repeat steps 5) through 8) so that the values of both VR102 and VR103 are target values.
Caution:If you cannot set VR102 and VR103 to the target values at the same time, turn VR103 fullycounterclockwise, and go back to step 5) and make adjustments once again.
10) Make a copy, and check to make sure that it is free of fogging and its text is adequately dark.• If the copy is foggy or its text is too light, go back to step 1) and start over.• If the results of adjustment for a second time are not good, make adjustments using the den-
sity correction switch (SW101).
Figure 11-269
SW101
Lighter
Darker
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-46
4. Adjusting the Reproduction Ratio (fine adjustment)Adjust the reproduction ratio if you have replaced the following:• DC controller PCB
Making AdjustmentsBefore Starting the Work• Meter
1) Before replacing the DC controller PCB, turn on the power; then, connect the meter probes toCP23 and GND on the DC controller PCB, and measure the voltage.+ probe ........CP23- probe .........GND
Figure 11-270
2) After replacing the DC controller PCB, measure the voltage as in step 1); then, turn VR106 onthe DC controller PCB so that the reading is the same as before replacement.
VR106 CP23 GND
VR106
VR107
VR104 VR105
CP
GN
D1
CP
23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-47
5. Checking the Photointerrupters1) Set the meter range to 12 VDC.2) Connect the - probe to GND (CPGND1) on the DC controller PCB.
Figure 11-271
3) Make checks as instructed.
Reference:The photointerrupers other than those shown in Table 11-209 are connected in a matrix, hence
the omission from the table.
Table 11-208
Sensor
PS1Scanner home positionsensor (SCHP)
PS2Lens home position sen-sor (LHP)
PS4Vertical path roller pa-per sensor (PDP)
Q751Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor (RPD)
Checks
During standby, movethe scanner by hand.
During standby, movethe lens mount byhand.
During standby, movethe detecting lever byhand.
During standby, movethe detecting lever byhand.
When the light-block-ing plate is at PS1,When the light-block-ing plate is not at PS1,When the light-block-ing plate is at PS2,When the light-block-ing plate is not at PS2,When the light-block-ing plate is at PS4,When the light-block-ing plate is not at PS4,When the light-block-ing plate is at Q751,When the light-blocking plate is not atQ751,
Connector
J101-3
J109-10
J132-5
J108-3
Voltage(approx.)
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
0V
5V
GND
VR106
VR107
VR104 VR105
CP
GN
D1
CP
23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-48
III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS
A. Making Initial Checks
1. Site EnvironmentCheck the site against the following considerations:
a. The voltage of the power source is as rated.b. The site must not be subject to high temperature or humidity (as near a water faucet, water
boiler, humidifier) or dust. The machine must not be near a source of fire.c. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas.d. The machine must not be exposed to direct rays of the sun. (As necessary, instruct the user to
provide curtains.)e. The site must be well ventilated.f. The machine must be kept level.
2. Checking the OriginalsCheck the originals to find out whether the problem in question is caused by the machine or the
originals.a. The copy density adjusting lever is often best if set to the middle index.b. Originals with a red tint tend to produce copies with poor contrast; e.g., red sheets.c. Originals which are diazo copies or with transparency tend to produce copies which can be
mistaken for "foggy" copies.Originals prepared in pencil tend to produce copies with "light" images.
3. Copyboard Cover and Copyboard GlassIf the copyboard cover or the copyboard glass is soiled, clean it with mild detergent solution or
alcohol; if scratched, replace it.
4. LensCheck the lens for dirt. If any, clean it with a cotton swab.
5. Checking the Transfer Charging Rollera. Check the transfer charging roller for dirt or fault (scratches).
6. Feeding AssemblyCheck the feeding assembly for dirt. If any dirt is found, clean it with a moist cloth.
7. Copy Papera. Is copy paper of a type recommended by Canon?b. Is copy paper moist?
Try paper fresh out of package.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-49
8. Consumablea. Cartridge
When the cartridge starts to run out of toner, copies will start to have white lines or spots asshown.
Figure 11-301
Try the following as necessary:1) Take out the cartridge from the machine, and shake it several times.
Figure 11-302
2) Set the cartridge back into the machine, and make copies.• If the copies are normal,
You may continue to use the cartridge, but the user must know that it must be replaced witha new cartridge soon.
• If the copies are not normal,Replace the new cartridge.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-50
9. OthersWhen a machine is brought in from a cold place (e.g., warehouse) to a warm place, condensa-
tion can occur inside it, leading to various problems; e.g.,a. Condensation on the scanner (glass, lens, mirror, reflecting plate) will cause dark images.b. The drum is likely to be cold (high OPC electrical resistance), not enabling good contrast.c. Condensation in the pickup/feeding assembly tends to cause feeding faults.d. Condensation on the lower roller of the manual feed assembly will reduce friction, causing
pickup faults.If condensation is noted, dry wipe the parts in question.The cartridge can develop condensation if it is opened immediately after it has been brought
from a cold to warm place. Instruct the user so that the cartridge is not opened before it has becomeused to the room temperature (one to two hours).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
11-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-52
NOTE: The samples are created intentionally. The NA-3 Test Sheet was copied in the direct mode in A3 and printed with a reduction of about 19%; actual images may be somewhat different.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-53
C. Troubleshooting Image Faults
1 The copy is too light. (halftone area only)2 The copy is too light. (including solid area)3 The copy is too light. (enter image, appreciably)
YES/NOYES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YESNO
CauseLens, Reflect-ing plate, AEsensor, Staticeliminator---------------
Transfercharging roller
Copy paper
Transfer lowerguide, Varis-tor
Compositepower supplyPCB, DCcontrollerPCB
CartridgeDevelopingbias, Develop-ing biasterminal
Step1
2
3
4
5
6
ChecksClean the lens, reflecting plate, AE sensor,and static eliminator. Is the problemcorrected?
Turn off the power in the middle of acopying run, and open the machine’s topunit. Is the toner image before transfermore or less normal? (Be sure to make acheck in a short time to protect the drumfrom light.)Is the transfer charging roller normal?
Try fresh copy paper. Is the problemcorrected?
Measure the electrical resistance on thetransfer lower guide plate and the sideplate (metal) of the fixing assembly. Is it0Ω?
Replace the cartridge. Is the problemcorrected?
ActionEnd.
Go to step 6.
1. Mount the transfercharging rollercorrectly.
2. Replace the transfercharging roller.
1. The copy paper maybe moist. Instruct theuser on the correctmethod of storage.
2. Inform the user thatusing non-recom-mended paper maynot bring the bestresults.
1. Check to find out ifthe transfer lowerguide happens to be incontact with a metalpart (side plate).
2. Replace the varistor.1. Check the transfer
high-voltage terminalcontacts for electricalcontinuity.
2. Check the compositepower supply and theDC controller PCB.
End.Replace the electric unit(composite power supplyPCB, DC controllerPCB).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-54
4 The copy has uneven density. (darker at front)5 The copy has uneven density. (lighter at front)
YES/NOYES
YES
NO
CauseScanner
Cartridge,Scanninglamp
Transferchargingroller
Step1
2
ChecksClean the scanning lamp, reflectingplate, lens, and mirror. Is the problemcorrected?Turn off the power in the middle of acopying run, and open the machine. Isthe toner image on the photosensitivedrum before transfer more or lessuneven?
ActionEnd.
1. Replace the car-tridge.
2. Replace the scan-ning lamp.
1. Mount the transfercharging rollercorrectly.
2. Replace the transfercharging rollercorrectly.
6 The copy is foggy. (entire face)
YES/NONO
YES
NO
YES
Cause---------------
Scanner
Groundingspring
Scanninglamp, Devel-oping bias
Step1
2
3
ChecksIs the density correction switch(SW101) or the density adjusting leverset to the middle setting?
Clean the scanning lamp, reflectingplate, lens, and mirror. Is the problemcorrected?Set the cartridge in the machine. Isthere electrical continuity between thePCB of the base of the drum and themachine’s top unit?
ActionSet the switch or thelever to the middlesetting, and make acopy. If the image isstill foggy, to step 2).End.
Check to see if thegrounding spring ismounted correctly (inreference to the drumdrive gear).1. Check the activation
of the scanninglamp.
2. Check the develop-ing assembly.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-55
10 The copy has white spots. (vertical)11 The copy has white lines. (vertical)
YES/NOYES
YES
YES
YES
NO
CauseFixingassembly
Cartridge
Static elimi-natorTransferchargingroller
Cartridge
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksTurn off the power in the middle of acopying run, and open the machine’stop unit. Does the copy image beforemoving through the fixing assemblyhave white spots or white lines?Shake the cartridge several times. Isthe problem corrected?
Clean the static eliminator. Is theproblem corrected?Is there foreign matter or scratches inthe transfer charging roller assembly?
ActionCheck the fixingassembly.
Inform the user thatthe cartridge is run-ning out of toner.End.
Remove the foreignmatter, or replace thetransfer chargingroller.Replace the cartridge.
7 The copy is foggy vertically.8 The copy has black lines. (vertical, fuzzy, thick)9 The copy has black lines. (vertical, fine)
YES/NOYES
YES
YESNO
CauseScanner
Transferguide assem-blyCartridge
Step1
2
3
ChecksClean the scanning lamp, reflectingplate, lens, and mirror. Is the problemcorrected?Clean the transfer guide assembly. Isthe problem corrected?
Take out and then set the cartridgeonce again. Is the problem corrected?
ActionEnd.
End.
End.Replace the cartridge.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-56
13 The back of the copy is soiled.
YES/NONO
YES
YES
NO
Cause---------------
Transferguide assem-bly
FeedingassemblyPickup guideassembly,Deliveryroller
Step1
2
3
ChecksTurn off the power while copy paper ismoving through the feeding assembly.Is the back of the paper soiled?Is the transfer guide assembly soiled?
Is the feeding assembly soiled?
ActionGo to step 3.
1. Clean the transferguide.
2. Clean the registra-tion roller.
3. Check the varistor.4. Check the cartridge
for leakage of toner.Clean the feedingassembly.Clean the pickup guideassembly and thedelivery roller.
12 The copy has white spots. (horizontal)
YES/NOYES
YES
Yes
NO
CauseCopy paper
Scanner rail
Scanninglamp, Devel-oping bias
Step1
2
3
ChecksIs the paper of a recommended type?
Try paper fresh out of package. Is theproblem corrected?
Is the problem noted at the sameposition on all copies?
ActionTry a recommendtype. If the results aregood, ask the user touse a recommendedtype.The paper may bemoist. Instruct the useron the correct methodof storing paper.1. Check the scanner
rail for foreignmatter.
2. Adjust the tensionof the scanner cable.
Check the scanninglamp for flickeringand the presence/absence of a develop-ing bias.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-57
14 The copy has a fixing fault.
YES/NONO
YES
NO
YES
CauseCopy paper
Fixing film
Fixing heater
DC control-ler PCB,Compositepowersupply PCB
Step1
2
3
ChecksIs the copy paper of a recommendedtype?
Is the problem vertical and, in addi-tion, in the form of lines?
Does the heater turn on when the CopyStart key is pressed?
ActionTry a recommendedtype. If the results aregood, ask the user touse a recommendedtype.Check the fixing filmand the fixing lowerroller for scratches. Ifthere are scratches,replace them.See “The fixing heaterfails to turn on.”The control tempera-ture of the fixingheater is likely to betoo low. Check thefixing assembly topunit, DC controllerPCB, and compositepower supply PCB.
15 The copy has a misplaced leading edge. (extremely excess margin)16 The copy has a misplaced leading edge. (excess margin)17 The copy has a misplaced leading edge (no margin)
YES/NONO
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
CausePickuproller,Pickupclutch,CassetteSensor(PS1), Light-blockingplateVR104
Solenoid(SL2), DCcontrollerPCBCopy paper
Registrationclutch
Step1
2
3
4
5
ChecksMake copies using the cassette andmanually. Are the results the same?
Are the scanner home position sensor(PS1) and the light-blocking platenormal? (See the instructions on howto check the photointerrupter.)Adjust the image leading edge margin.(p. 11-6) Is the problem corrected?Does the registration clutch solenoid(SL2) operate normally?
Is the paper of a recommended type?
ActionCheck the pickuproller, pickup clutch,and cassette. Or,replace them.
Replace the sensor, orcheck the light-blocking plate.
End.
1. Check the solenoid(SL2).
2. Check the DCcontrol PCB.
Try a recommendedtype. If the results aregood, ask the user touse a recommendedtype.Check the registrationclutch.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-58
19 The copy has horizontal fogging.
YES/NOYES
YESNO
YES
NO
CauseScanninglampCartridge,High-voltagetransformerassembly
ScanningsystemFeedingsystem
Step1
2
3
ChecksDoes the scanning lamp flicker?
Replace the cartridge. Is the problemcorrected?
Make a reduced copy, and compare itagainst one made in Direct. Is theproblem found at different positions?
ActionReplace the scanninglamp.End.Check the high-voltage transformer(composite powersupply PCB).Check the scanningsystem.Check the feedingsystem.
18 The copy has a blurred image.
YES/NOYES
NO
YES
YES
NO
CauseScannerdrive cable
Scanner rail
---------------
FeedingsystemCartridge
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksDoes the cable wind on itself when thescanner is moving? Or, is the cable tooslack or too taut?
Move the No. 1 mirror mount slowlyby hand. Does it move slowly?
Is abnormal noise heard from thescanner motor?
Does the copy paper spring up or stoparound the transfer assembly?
Action1. Route the cable
correctly.2. If the cable is
twisted or frayed,replace it.
Clean the surface ofthe scanner rail withalcohol. Then, applylubricant. (CK-0551)See "The scanner failsto move forward/inreverse."Check the feedingassembly for burrs.Replace the cartridge.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-59
20 The copy has poor sharpness. (out-of-focus)
YES/NOYES
YES
NO
NO
YESNO
Cause---------------
Original
Lens
Mirrorposition
ScannerCartridge
Step1
2
3
4
5
ChecksIs the image also too light?
Is the original off the copyboard glass?
Turn off and then on the power switch.Does the lens move smoothly?
Is the horizontal ratio in Direct withinspecification?
Clean the scanning lamp, reflectingplate, mirror, and lens. Is the problemcorrected?
ActionCorrect the lightimage problem first.1. Check the
copyboard cover toosee if it happens tobe warping.
2. Instruct the user onthe correct methodof placing originals.
Check the lens rail forforeign matter, andclean it.Adjust the distancebetween No. 1 mirrorand the No. 2 mirror.End.Replace the cartridge.
21 The copy is blank.
YES/NONO
YESNO
NO
NO
YES
NO
CauseCartridge
Drum driveassemblyHigh-voltagetransformer
Primaryhigh-voltagechargingterminal,cartridge
Step1
23
4
5
6
ChecksIs the cartridge set in the machine?
Does the cartridge have toner?Has the open seal been removed?
Set the cartridge in the machine, andclose the machine. Does the drumcover shutter open properly?Does the drum drive gear rotatenormally?Is the primary charging terminal onthe front left of the cartridge in firmcontact with the high-voltage terminalat the machine's bottom?
ActionSet the cartridge in themachine.Replace the cartridge.Remove the openingseal.Check the cartridge.
Check the drum driveassembly.Check the high-voltage transformer(composite powersupply PCB).1. Check the contacts
for electrical conti-nuity.
2. Replace the car-tridge
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-60
22 The copy is solid black.
YES/NONO
YES
Cause---------------
Step1
ChecksDoes the scanning lamp remain onduring copying?
ActionSee “The scanninglamp fails to turn on.”Is the cartridge setcorrectly?
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-61
IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions
1 E0
YES/NOYES
NO
Cause----------------
Step1
Checks1) Turn off the power, and short JP101
and JP102 on the DC controllerPCB with a screwdriver.
Figure 11-401
2) While keeping the condition in step1), turn on the power switch.
3) Is an error code indicated in re-sponse to a press on the Copy Startkey?
ActionSee the instructionsgiven for the respec-tive error code.End.
JP102 JP101
JP10
1
JP10
2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-62
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11-62
2 E000
YES/NONO
NO
YES
YES
NO
CauseThermistor(TH1)
Heater,Fuse (FU2)
Thermistor(TH1)Compositepowersupply PCBDC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksAre the connection of J102 on the DCcontroller PCB and the wiring to thethermistor (TH1) normal?
Is there electrical continuity betweenJ207-1 and -2 on the fixing heaterside?
Replace the fixing upper unit. Is theproblem corrected?Replace the composite power supplyPCB. Is the problem corrected?
ActionCorrect the connectionof J102 on the DCcontroller PCB and thewiring to the ther-mistor (TH1).Check the wiring fromthe composite powersupply PCB to thefixing heater; ifnormal, replace thefixing assembly upperunit.End.
End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
3 E001
YES/NONO
YES
YES
NO
CauseThermistor(TH1)
Thermistor
Compositepowersupply PCBDC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
ChecksAre the connection of J102 on the DCcontroller PCB and the wiring to thethermistor (TH1) normal?
Replace the fixing assembly upperunit. Is the problem corrected?Replace the composite power supplyPCB. Is the problem corrected?
ActionCorrect the connectionof J102 on the DCcontroller PCB and thewiring to the ther-mistor (TH1).End.
End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-63
4 E002, E003
YES/NONO
NO
YES
YES
NO
CauseThermistor(TH1)
Heater,Fuse (FU2)
Thermistor(TH1)Compositepowersupply PCBDC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksIs the connection of J102 on the DCcontroller PCB and the wiring to thethermistor (TH1) normal?
Is there electrical continuity betweenJ207-1 and -2 on the fixing heaterside?
Replace the fixing assembly upperunit. Is the problem corrected?Replace the composite power supplyPCB. Is the problem corrected?
ActionCorrect the connectionof J102 on the DCcontroller PCB and thewiring to the ther-mistor (TH1).Check the wiring fromthe composite powersupply PCB to thefixing heater; ifnormal, replace thefixing upper unit.End.
End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
5 E010
YES/NONO
NO
NO
YES
NO
CauseWiring 1
Wiring 2
DC powersupply
Main motor(M1)DC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksAre the connection of J205 on thecomposite power supply PCB and thewiring to the main motor (M1) nor-mal?
Is the wiring from J203 and J202 onthe composite power supply PCB toJ103 and J105, respectively, on the DCcontroller PCB normal?Turn on the power switch. Is thevoltage between J901-1 (+) and -2 (-)on the main motor drive PCB about 24V?
Replace the main motor (M1). Is theproblem corrected?
ActionCorrect the connectionof J205 on the com-posite power supplyPCB and the wiring tothe main motor (M1).Correct the connectionand wiring of theconnectors.
Check the wiring fromthe main motor driverPCB to the compositepower supply PCB; ifnormal, see “DCpower fails to turnon.”End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-64
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11-64
6 E064
YES/NOYES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
CauseWiring
High-voltagecontact
TransferchargingrollerPrimarychargingrollerHigh-voltagecableCompositepowersupply PCBDC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
4
5
6
ChecksTurn off and then on the power switch;then, set the copy count to '1'. Is 'E064'indicated at the end of a copying run?
Is the connection between the high-voltage contacts of the machine's topand bottom units normal?
Is the transfer charging roller or thecontact faulty?
Replace the cartridge. Is the problemcorrected?
Does the high-voltage cable havescratches or tears?Replace the composite power supplyPCB. Is the problem corrected?
ActionCheck the wiringbetween the DCcontroller PCB and thecomposite powersupply PCB. Checkthe wiring between thecomposite powersupply PCB and thehigh-voltage contactPCB.Correct the high-voltage contacts of themachine's top andbottom units.Replace the transfercharging roller.
End.
Replace the high-voltage cable.End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
7 The keys on the control panel are locked. ('E202')
YES/NONO
NO
YES
Cause----------------
Scannerhome posi-tion sensor(PS1)DC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
ChecksIs the scanner in the home positionwhen 'E202' turns on?Is the scanner home position sensor(PS1) normal? (For instructions onhow to check photointerrupers, see p.11-47.)
ActionSee “The scanner failsto move forward.”Check the wiring fromJ101 on the DCcontroller PCB to PS1;if normal, replace PS1.Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-65
8 E210
YES/NONO
NO
YES
Cause----------------
Lens homepositionsensor (PS2)
DC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
ChecksDoes the lens move when the power isturned on?Is the lens home position sensor (PS2)normal? (For instructions on how tocheck the photointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)
ActionSee “The lens fails tomove.”Check the wiring fromJ109 on the DCcontroller PCB to PS2;if normal, replace PS2.Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
9 E220
YES/NONO
YES
NO
Cause----------------
Compositepowersupply PCBDC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
ChecksDoes the scanning lamp turn on whenthe Copy Start key is pressed?Replace the composite power supplyPCB. Is the problem corrected?
ActionSee “The scanninglamp fails to turn on.”End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
10 E240
YES/NONO
YES
NO
CauseWiring
Compositepowersupply PCBDC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
ChecksIs the wiring from J203 and J204 onthe composite power supply PCB andJ103 and J104, respectively, on the DCcontroller PCB normal?Replace the composite power supplyPCB. Is the problem corrected?
ActionCorrect the connectionand the wiring of theconnectors.
End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
11 E261
YES/NOYES
NO
CausePowersupplyfrequency
Compositepowersupply PCB
Step1
ChecksTurn off and then on the power switch.Is the problem corrected?
ActionEnd. However, if‘E261’ occurs fre-quently, advise theuser to use a frequencystabilizer.Replace the compositepower supply PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-66
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11-66
12 E400
YES/NOYES
NO
YESNO
Cause----------------
5V powersupply
ADF con-troller PCB
Step1
2
3
ChecksTurn off and then on the power. Is theprobrem corrected?
Set the matter to the 20VDC range,and connect the + probe to the foot ofthe push swich on the ADF controllerPCB and the - probe to the copierground. Is the voltage about 5V?
Figure 11-402
Replace the ADF controller PCB. Isthe problem corrected?
ActionEnd. (Check thewiring between thecopier’s DC controllerPCB and the ADFcontroller PCB.)Replace the ADFcontroller PCB.
End.Replace the copier’sDC controller PCB.
0FE
DC
B A 9 8 76
54
3
21ON
1 2
13 E803
YES/NOYES
YES
NO
CauseMalfunction
DC control-ler PCB.Compositepowersupply PCB
Step1
2
ChecksTurn off and then on the power switch.Is the problem corrected?Replace the DC controller PCB. Is theproblem corrected?
ActionEnd.
End.
Replace the compositepower supply PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-67
14 AC power fails to turn on.
YES/NONO
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
CausePower plug
----------------
Machine topunitPowersupply
Fuse(FU501)
Fuse(FU102)
Door switch(DS1)
Noise filterPCBHarness
Connectorconnection 1
Connectorconnection 2
Controlpanel PCBCompositepowersupply PCB
Step1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
ChecksIs the power plug connected to thepower outlet?Turn on the power switch. Is ‘E0’indicated in the display?Is the machine’s top unit closedfirmly?Is the rated voltage present at thepower outlet?
Is the fuse (FU501) on the noise filterPCB blown?120V model: 250 V, 15 A220/240V model: 250 V, 6.3 A
Is the fuse (FU102) on the compositepower supply PCB blown?120V model: 125 V, 5 A220/240V model: 250 V, 2.5 A
Remove the door switch (DS1), andconnect the meter probes to F1 and F3or F2 and F4 of the faston of the doorswitch. Is the resistance about 0 Ωwhen the actuator is pressed add about∞ Ω when it is released?Is the rated voltage present betweenJ501-1 and -2?Is the rated voltage present betweenJ201-1 and J201-2?
Is there electrical continuity betweenJ111-15 on the DC controller PCB andJ301-15 on the control panel PCB?
Is there electrical continuity betweenJ204-1 on the composite power supplyPCB and J104-7 on the DC controllerPCB?
Replace the control panel PCB.Is theproblem corrected?
ActionConnect the powerplug.See the descriptionsunder “E0.”Close the machine'stop unit.Inform the user thatthe problem is not themachine’s.Remove the cause, andreplace the fuse.
Remove the cause ofthe problem, andreplace the fuse.
Replace the doorswitch (DS1).
Replace the noisefilter PCB.Check the connectorsand the wiring if theyare normal.Correct the electricalcontinuity of J111 onthe DC controller PCBand J301 on thecontrol panel PCB.Check the connectionof J104 on the DCcontroller PCB andJ204 on the compositepower supply PCB; ifnormal, replace theDC controller PCB.End.
Replace the compositepower supply PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-68
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11-68
15 DC power fails to turn on.
YES/NONO
YES
YES
NO
CauseAC powersupply
Wiring, DCload
Fuse
Compositepowersupply PCB
Step1
2
3
ChecksIs AC power present between J201-1and -2 on the composite power supplyPCB?Turn off the power switch, and discon-nect J202 and J205 from the compositepower supply PCB.Set the meter range to 30 VDC, andturn on the power switch. Is thevoltage between the following termi-nals normal?
Table 11-401
Is the fuse (FU102) on the compositepower supply PCB blown?120V model: 125 V, 5 V220/240V model: 250 V, 2.5 A
ActionSee “AC power failsto turn on.”
See the descriptionsunder “E0.”
Remove the cause ofthe problem, andreplace the fuse.Replace the compositepower supply PCB.
RemarksTo DCcontrollerPCB
To mainmotordriverPCB
ConnectorJ202
J205
Pin1234561234
OutputGND24V5V5V
GND24V
--
GND24V
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-69
16 Pickup fails. (cassette)
YES/NONO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
CauseMain motor(M1)Cassette
Paper incassette
Pickupclutchsolenoid(SL1),Cassettepickupsolenoid(SL5)
CassettespringDC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
4
5
ChecksDoes the main motor (M1) rotate whenthe Copy Start key is pressed?Is the cassette set correctly?
Is the paper in the cassette placedcorrectly?
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, andconnect the meter probes to the fol-lowing terminals. Does the voltagechange to about 24 V in keeping withpickup operation?
Table 11-402
Is the force of the cassette springwithin specification? (See p. 11-10.)
ActionSee “The main motorfails to rotate.”Set the cassette cor-rectly.Instruct the user on thecorrect method ofplacing paper.Check the wiring fromthe solenoid to the DCcontroller PCB; ifnormal, replace thesolenoid.
Replace the cassettespring.Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
Pickup clutchsolenoid (SL1)Cassette pickupsolenoid (SL5)
+
J109-4
J132-2
-
J109-3
J132-1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-70
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11-70
17 Pickup fails. (multifeeder)
YES/NONO
NO
NO
NO
YES
CauseWrongoperation
Main motor(M1)Paper place-ment
Multifeederpickupsolenoid(SL4),Pickupclutchsolenoid(SL1)DC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksIs the multifeeder selected on thecontrol panel?
Does the main motor (M1) rotate whenthe Copy Start key is pressed?Is the paper placed in the multifeedercorrectly?
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, andconnect the meter probes as indicated.Does the voltage change to about 24 Vin keeping with pickup operation?
Table 11-403
ActionInstruct the user on thecorrect way of operat-ing the machine.See “The main motorfails to rotate.”Instruct the user on thecorrect way of placingpaper.Check the wiring fromthe solenoid to the DCcontroller PCB; ifnormal, replace thesolenoid in question.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
Multifeederpickup solenoid(SL4)Pickup clutchsolenoid (SL1)
+
J109-8
J109-4
-
J109-7
J109-3
18 Pickup fails. (single-feeder)
YES/NONO
NO
YES
CauseMain motor(M1)Single-feederpaper sensor(PS5)
DC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
ChecksDoes the main motor rotate when theCopy Start key is pressed?Is the single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)normal?
ActionSee “The main motorfails to rotate.”Check the wiring fromJ113 to PS5 on the DCcontrol PCB; if nor-mal, replace PS5.Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-71
19 The scanner fails to move forward.
YES/NONO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
CauseCable
Scanner path
Compositepowersupply PCB
Pre-registra-tion rollerpaper sensor(Q751)
Scanner/lensdrive motor(M2)DC controllerPCB
Step1
2
3
4
5
ChecksIs the scanner drive cable routedcorrectly?Is the scanner rail soiled?Move the scanner by hand. Does itmove smoothly?
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, andconnect the meter probes to J202-2 (+)and -1 (-) on the composite powersupply PCB. Is the meter readingabout 24 V?Is the pre-registration roller papersensor (Q751) normal? (For instruc-tions on how to check thephotointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)
Replace the scanner/lens drive motor(M2). Is the problem corrected?
ActionRoute the cablecorrectly.Check the surface ofthe scanner rail fordirt, foreign matter, orobject which mayinterfere.See “DC power failsto turn on.”
Check the wiring fromJ108 on the DCcontroller PCB toQ751; if normal,replace Q751.End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
20 The registration roller fails to rotate.
Yes/NoNo
No
No
Yes
No
CauseMain motor(M1)
Pre-registra-tion rollerpaper sensor(Q751)
Registrationroller springclutch
Registrationclutchsolenoid(SL2)DC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksDoes the main motor (M1) start torotate when the Copy Start key ispressed?Is the pre-registration roller papersensor (Q751) normal? (For instruc-tions on how to check thephotointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)
Does the registration clutch solenoid(SL2) turn on for a moment after theCopy Start key is pressed?
Set the meter range to 30 VDC. Doesthe voltage between J109-6 (+) and -5(-) on the DC controller PCB changeto about 24 V for a moment after theCopy Start key is pressed?
ActionSee “The main motorfails to rotate.”
Check the wiring fromJ108 on the DCcontroller PCB toQ751; if normal,replace Q751.Check the position ofthe solenoid; if nor-mal, check or replacethe control ring.Check the wiring fromJ109 on the DCcontroller PCB to SL2;if normal, replace SL2.Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-72
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11-72
21 The blanking lamp fails to turn on.
YES/NONO
YES
CauseSide blank-ing PCB
DC control-ler PCB
Step1
ChecksRemove J106 from the DC controlPCB, and set the meter range to 1 kΩ;then, connect the meter probes toJ106-1 and -2 on the harness side. Isthe meter reading about 20 Ω?
ActionCheck the harness; ifnormal, replace theside blanking PCB.Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
22 The scanning lamp fails to turn on.
YES/NONO
NO
NO
YES
NO
CauseScanninglamp
Fuse (FU1)
Lamp
DC control-ler PCBCompositepowersupply PCB
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksTurn off the power switch, and discon-nect the power plug from the poweroutlet.Is the scanning lamp (LA1)mounted correctly?Set the meter range to 1 kΩ, andconnect the meter probes to bothterminals of the fuse (FU1). Does theindex of the meter swing?Disconnect the connector J910 from thecomposite power supply PCB, and setthe tester range to 1kΩ.Does the tester index swing when theprobes are connected to J910-1 andJ910-3 on the lamp side?Replace the DC controller PCB. Is theproblem corrected?
ActionMount the scanninglamp correctly.
Replace the fuse(FU1).
Check the cable fromthe composite powersupply PCB to thelamp; if normal,replace the lamp.
End.
Check the wiringbetween the DCcontroller PCB and thecomposite powersupply PCB; if nor-mal, replace thecomposite powersupply PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-73
23 The lens fails to turn on.
YES/NONO
NO
NO
YES
NO
CauseLens sole-noid (SL3)
Lens cable,Pulley, Rail
DC powersupply
Scanner/lensdrive motor(M2)DC controlPCB
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksDoes the lens solenoid (SL3) turn onwhen the power switch is turned on?
Are the lens cable, pulley, and railnormal?
Set the meter range to the 30 VDC,and connect J202-2 (+) and -1 (-) onthe composite power supply PCB. Isthe meter reading about 24 V?Replace the scanner/lens drive motor(M2). Is the problem corrected?
ActionCheck the wiring fromJ109 on the DCcontroller PCB to SL3;if normal, replace SL3.Check the lens cable,pulley, and rail; asnecessary, clean thecable and adjust itstension.See “DC power failsto turn on.”
End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
24 The fixing heater fails to turn on.
YES/NOYES
YES
NO
Cause----------------
DC control-ler PCBCompositepowersupply PCB
Step1
2
ChecksIs 'E0' indicated?
Replace the DC controller PCB. Is theproblem corrected?
ActionSee the descriptionsunder “E0.”End.
Replace the compositepower supply PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-74
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11-74
25 The "Add Paper" message fails to turn off.
YES/NONO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
CauseCassette
Lens cable,Pulley, Rail
DC powersupply
Vertical pathroller papersensor (PS4)
Controlpanel PCBDC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
3
4
5
ChecksIs the cassette set correctly?
Are the lens cable, pulley, and railnormal?
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, andconnect the meter probes to J202-2 (+)and -1 (-) on the composite powerPCB. Is the meter reading about 24 V?Is the vertical path roller paper sensor(PS4) normal? (For instructions onhow to check the photointerrupters,see p. 11-47.)
Replace the control panel PCB. Is theproblem corrected?
ActionSet the cassette cor-rectly.Check the lens cable,pulley, and rail; asnecessary, clean thecable and adjust itstension.See “The DC powerfails to turn on.”
Check the wiring fromJ132 on the DCcontroller PCB to PS4;if normal, replace thePS4.End.
Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
26 The "Jam" message fails to turn off.
YES/NOYES
NO
YES
CauseJam paper
Sensor
DC control-ler PCB
Step1
2
ChecksIs the jam paper near any of thefollowing sensors?• Vertical path roller paper sensor
(PS4)• Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)• Pre-registration roller paper sensor
(Q751)• Delivery sensor (PS3)Is the sensor checked in step 1 nor-mal? (For instructions on how to checkthe photointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)
ActionRemove the jampaper.
Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCBto each sensor; ifnormal, replace thesensor in question.Replace the DCcontroller PCB.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-75
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS
A. Copy Paper Jam
Inside the machine, jams tend occur in the following blocks:[1] Pickup block[2] Separation/feeding block[3] Fixing/delivery block
The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to the location of a jam.
Figure 11-501
[3] [2] [1]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-76
1 Pickup Assembly
YES/NONO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
Cause----------------
Cassette
Copy paper
Copy paper
DC control-ler PCB,PickupclutchRegistrationroller driveassemblyVertical pathroller papersensor (PS4)Pickuproller,Vertical pathroller, Roll
Step1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ChecksDoes the problem occur when thecassette is selected as the source ofpaper?Is the cassette set correctly?
Is the copy paper curled or wavy?
Try paper recommended by Canon. Isthe problem corrected?Does the pickup roller of the pickupassembly of the selected source(cassette, manual feeder) rotate duringa copying run?Does the registration roller operatenormally?
Does the vertical path roller papersensor operate normally?
ActionGo to step 5.
Set the cassette cor-rectly.Replace the copypaper. Instruct the useron the correct methodof storing paper.Ask the user to userecommended paper.See “Pickup fails” forthe source of paper inquestion.
See “The registrationroller fails to rotate.”
Replace the sensor orthe lever.
Check the roller forwear and deformation,and the roll for attach-ment.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-77
2 Separation/Feeding Assembly
YES/NOYES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
CauseCopy paper
Feedingassembly
Feed belt,RollerStatic elimi-natorPre-registra-tion rollerpaper sensor(Q751)Registrationroller
Registration-relatedspring,Spring clutchof registra-tion assem-bly
Step1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ChecksTry paper recommended by Canon. Isthe problem corrected?Is the copy paper curled, wavy, orotherwise deformed?Is there foreign matter in the feedingassembly?
Is the feed belt rotating properly?
Is the static eliminator soiled withtoner or the like?Does the pre-registration roller papersensor operate normally?
Is the registration roller worn, de-formed, or soiled?
ActionAsk the user to userecommended paper.Replace the paper.
Instruct the user on thecorrect method ofstoring paper.Remove the foreignmatter.Check the belt and theroller.Replace the sensor orthe lever.
Clean the staticeliminator.If dirt is found, cleanwith alcohol; if wearor deformation isfound, replace it.1. Check the spring
used to controlregistration.
2. Check the springclutch of the regis-tration assembly.
3 Fixing/Delivery Assembly
YES/NOYES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
CauseInlet guide
Fixing lowerroller, FixingfilmDeliverypaper detect-ing leverDeliverysensor (PS3)Deliveryroller driveassemblyLeadingedge margin
Step1
2
3
4
5
ChecksIs the fixing inlet guide soiled withtoner?Is the fixing lower roller or the fixingfilm deformed or scratched?
Does the delivery detecting levermove smoothly?
Does the delivery sensor operatenormally?Does the delivery roller operatesmoothly?
ActionClean the guide withsolvent.Replace the roller orthe fixing assemblyupper unit.Make adjustments sothat it movessmoothly.Replace the sensor.
Check the deliveryroller drive assembly.
Check the leadingedge of copy paper formargin.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-78
B. Faulty Feeding
1 Double-Feeding
YES/NONO
NO
YES
NO
YES
CauseCassette
Copy paper
Claw (cas-sette)
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksIs the copy paper placed under theclaw properly?Push down the copy paper inside thecassette. Does it move up when let gowith its end coming under the claw?
Is the sheets of paper placed in thecassette uneven?Is the paper of a type recommended byCanon?
ActionPlace the copy paperproperly.1. Check the copy
paper width.2. Check the position
of the side guideplate of the cassette.(universal cassetteonly)
3. Measure the forceof the spring of thecassette; if faulty,replace the cassettespring.
Even out the sheets inthe cassette.Ask the user to userecommended paper.Check the claw fordeformation.
2 Wrinkles
YES/NOYES
YES
YES
NO
YES
CausePickupassembly,Vertical pathroller,RegistrationrollerCopy paper
FixingassemblyInlet guide
Step1
2
3
4
ChecksTurn off the power while copy paper ismoving through the feeding assembly.Is the copy paper wrinkled or foundaskew?
Try fresh paper. Is the problem cor-rected?
Try paper of a type recommended byCanon. Is the problem corrected?Is the inlet guide soiled with toner?
Action• Check the pickup
assembly.• Check the vertical
path roller.• Check the registra-
tion roller.The paper is moist.Instruct the user on thecorrect method ofstoring paper.Ask the user to userecommended paper.Check the fixingassembly.Clean the inlet guidewith solvent.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-79
VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF
ELECTRICAL PARTS
A. Sensors and Solenoids
Figure 11-601
PS
SL
DescriptionScanner home position detectionLens home position detectionDelivery assembly paper detectionVertical path assembly paperdetectionSingle-feeder paper detection
Pre-registration roller paper detec-tion
Pickup clutch solenoidRegistration clutch solenoidLens solenoidMultifeeder pickup solenoid
Cassette pickup solenoid
Symbol NamePhotointerrupters
Solenoid
NotationPS1PS2PS3PS4
PS5
Q751
SL1SL2SL3SL4
SL5
Remarks
Single-feedertype only
Multifeedertype only
SL4
SL1SL2
SL5
PS5
PS4
SL3
PS2
PS1
PS3
Q751
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-80
B. Switches
Figure 11-602
DescriptionDoor switchPower switch
Density correction switch
Symbol NameSwitch
Switch
NotationDS1SW309
SW101
Remarks
DS1 SW309
SW101
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-81
C. Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc.
Figure 11-603
DescriptionScanning lamp
Fixing heater
Main motorScanner/lens drive motor
Scanner cooling fan
Fixing heater temperature detectionScanner temperature detection
Lamp overheating detectionFixing heater overheating detection
Fixing film varistorTransfer guide varistor
Symbol NameLamp
Heater
Motor
Fan motor
Thermistor
Thermal fuse
Varistor
NotationLA1
H1
M1M2
FM1
TH1TH2
FU1FU2
VZ1VZ2
Remarks
M
M2M1
FU1
LA1
FM1VZ1H1
VZ2
TH1
TH2
FU2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-82
D. PCBs
Figure 11-604
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6][7]
[8]
[9]
DescriptionRemoves noise from the power supply.Controls sequence of operations.Supplies DC power, generates high voltage, andcontrols the scanning lamp.Makes an electrical connection between the machinetop and bottom.Provides copying insurrections/indications.Detects paper in front of the registration roller.Detects the density of originals.Used for blanking exposure.Used for blanking exposure.
Ref.[1][2][3]
[4]
[5][6][7][8][9]
NameNoise filter PCBDC controller PCBComposite power supply PCB
High-voltage contact PCB
Control panel PCBSensor PCBAE sensor PCBBlanking PCB (front)Blanking PCB (rear)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-83
E. ADF
DescriptionDelivery paper detectionRegistration roller paper detectionOriginal placement detection
ADF open/close switch
Belt motorPickup motor
Controls sequence of operations
Symbol
[1]
NamePhotointerrupter
Microswitch
Motor
ADF controllerPCB
NotationPI1PI2PI3
MS1
M1M2
Remarks
PS
M2
PI3
PI2
M1
PI1
MS1
[1]
M
Figure 11-605
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-84
F. Variable Resistors (VR) and Check Pins by PCB
Of the variable resistors (VR) and check pins, those needed in the field are discussed herein.Those not found in the discussions are for the factory only, requiring special tools and adjustmentto an extremely accuracy. Do not touch them in the field.
Caution:VRs that may be used in the field ................VRs that must not be used in the field .........
1. DC Controller PCB
Figure 11-606
2. Composite Power Supply PCB
Figure 11-607
J130 J114 J102 J111 J201J111
J108
3
12
1
2 8 1 9 1
JP102 JP1011
6
17
1
19
18 2
5
315121
6
SW101J113J132J106J109
1
J105J104
671
J103J107
J101
J131
811 41 11
VR104 VR106VR105
VR107
VR103 VR102
CP23 GND
1 1
2
JP104 JP103
J201
J207
2 1
2 121
FU102
J910
VR001
J205 1
4
J202
1 6
J213
J212
J209
J302VR301
VR801
J203 J2041 8 1 7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-85
3. ADF Controller PCB
Figure 11-608
1 10 TP1 1
9
J5
1
8 4
J2
1J1 CB1 2 1
J6
7
1
J3
FACE
PSW SW1 SW2
1 2
ON
Soldered side
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-86
VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS
The microprocessor on the machine’s DC controller PCB is equipped with a self diagnosticmechanism that checks the condition of the machine (particularly, sensors) and indicates an errorcode in the count/ratio indicator on the control panel upon detection of a fault.
In the case of ‘E001’, ‘E0’ and ‘01’ are flashed alternately.
Code Cause Description‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’ hasoccurred.
• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.• The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.• The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.• The DC controller PCB is faulty.• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.• The DC controller PCB is faulty.• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.• The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.• The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.• The DC controller PCB is faulty.• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.• The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.• The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.• The DC controller PCB is faulty.• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
The power switch is turned off and thenon immediately after an error (‘E000’,‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’) has occurred.• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) does not reach 65°C1.5 sec after the Copy Start key hasbeen pressed.
• The temperature detected by thethermistor (TH1) does not reach 150°C4 sec after the Copy Start key has beenpressed.
• The temperature detected by thethermistor (TH1) exceeds 230°C.
• The temperature detected by thethermistor (TH1) exceeds by 30°C ormore.
• The temperature detected by thethermistor (TH1) registers an increaseof 100°C or more within 1 sec.
• The temperature detected by thethermistor (TH1) registers an increaseof 40°C or more after it has reached100°C during standby.
• E0 detection signal (E0_DT) is de-tected twice or more in succession.
• The temperature detected by thethermistor (TH1) has exeeded 150°Cduring copy operation and maximumpower is applied for 10 to 14 secthereafter.
• The temperature detected by thethermistor (TH1) drops to and remains150°C or lower after it has reached160°C.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-87
Code Cause Description• The main motor (M1) is fault.• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The composite power supply PCB isfaulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The scanner home position sensor(PS1) is faulty.
• The scanner/lens drive motor (M2)is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The lens home position sensor(PS2) is faulty.
• The scanner/lens drive motor (M2)is faulty.
• The lens cable is faulty.• The DC controller PCB is faulty.• The scanning lamp (LA1) is faulty.• The DC controller PCB is faulty.• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.• The frequency of the power supply
is faulty.• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.• Data communication between the
copier and the ADF (faulty).
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• The rotation of the main motor deviates(indicated by MLOCK=0) for 1 sec ormore while the main motor drive signal(MMD=1) is being generated.
• The actual output value of the compos-ite power supply high voltage is differ-ent from the setting value twice insuccession.
• The scanner home position is notdetected within 10 sec after the scannerhas turned on.
• The scanner does not leave the homeposition after it has turned on.
• The lens hoe position is not detectedafter the lens has moved the maximumtravel distance.
• The lens does not leave the homeposition after it has turned on.
• The lamp ON detection signal is notdetected for 1 sec or more in thepresence of the scanning lamp Onsignal.
• The lamp ON detection signal isdetected for 1 sec or more in theabsence of the scanning lamp ONsignal.
• A fault in the communication betweenDC controller PCB and compositepower supply PCB is detected.
• The interval between zero-cross signalsis in excess of the allowed interval.
• The communication with the copier isinterrupted for 5 sec or more; thecommunication is monitored at alltimes.
• During a copying run, the +24 V powerdeviates from the control value by±20%.
The keys on thecontrol panelare lockedwithout errorcode indication.
( )
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)11-88
Caution:1. If the self-diagnosis has turned on, turn off the power switch to reset the machine.
In the case of ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’, however, the machine must be reset asfollows: this consideration is to prevent feeding power to the fixing heater otherwise oc-curring if the thermistor has an open circuit:
2. In the case of ‘E0’, ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’, or ‘E220’, the machine will turn off in1.5 sec for ‘E0’ and ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ and in 2 sec for ‘E220’.
3. In the case of ‘E0’, ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’, perform the following steps:1) Turn off the power switch, and short circuit JP101 and JP102 on the DC controller PCB
with a screwdriver or the like.
Figure 11-701
2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power switch.3) Stop short-circuiting JP101 and JP102.
JP102 JP101
JP10
1
JP10
2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1B. SIGNALS AND
ABBREVIATIONS ....................... A-3C. GENERAL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................... A-5D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................... A-7E. ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-15F. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-19G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-27H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-29
I. SENSOR CIRCUITDIAGRAM ................................. A-30
J. NOISE FILTER CIRCUITDIAGRAM ................................. A-31
K. HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACTCIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-32
L. BLANK EXPOSURE (front)CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-33
M. BLANK EXPOSURE (rear)CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-34
N. SPECIAL TOOLS ...................... A-35O. SOLVENTS/OILS ...................... A-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-1COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Power switchON
Copy Start keyON
Sequence STBY INTR AER SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
18
19
20
15
16
17
Main motor (M1)
Lens solenoid (SL3)
Scanner / lens drive motor (M2)Scanner home position sensor (PS1)Lens home position sensor (PS2)
Pickup clutch solenoid(SL1)Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)Vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4)Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)Pre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Primary AC bias
Primary DC bias
Developing AC bias
Fixing heater (H1)Scanner cooling fan (FM1)
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Developing DC bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
SCFW SCRV
: Scanner / lens drive motor (reverse)
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART1. COPYBOARD TYPE
(A4, 2 copies, DIRECT, from cassette)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Power switchON
Sequence
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)
Original detectionsensor (PI3)Registration paper sensor (PI2)
Delivery sensor (PI1)
Main motor (M1)
Scanner home positionsensor (PS1)
Scanner / lens drivemotor (M2)
Lens home positionsensor (PS2)
Lens solenoid (SL3)
Pickup clutch solenoid(SL1)Cassette pickup solenoid(SL5)Vertical path rollerpaper sensor (PS4)
Scanner cooling fan(FM1)
Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor (Q751)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Primary AC bias
Primary DC bias
Copier
ADF
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Fixing heater (H1)
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Copy Start keyONOriginal set
STBY INTR SCFW ORGSTORGST SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY
: Scanner / lens drive motor (reverse) / Pickup motor (reverse) / Belt motor (reverse)
Preparing for pickup
2. ADF TYPE (A4, 2 copies, DIRECT, from cassette)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-3COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1. SignalsACBIAS AC BIAS OSCILLATION signal[AE] AE SENSOR OUTPUT signalAEREF AE SENSOR REFERENCE signalBIAS_PWM DC BIAS CONTROL signalBIAS_S DC BIAS MONITOR signalCLK32K TRANSFORMER CONTROL signalCPUSD CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE signalDPD DELIVERY PAPER DETECTION signalDV_AC_ON DEVELOPING AC BIAS ON signalDV_DC_ON DEVELOPING DC BIAS ON signalE0_DT E0 DETECTION signalFM1D SCANNER COOLING FAN DRIVE signalHEAT_ERR FIXING HEATER ERROR signalHEAT_OFF FIXING HEATER OFF signalHEAT_PWM FIXING HEATER DUTY signalHEAT_TRG FIXING HEATER DRIVE signalLAMP_DETECT LAMP ACTIVATION DETECTION signalLAMP_ON SCANNING LAMP ACTIVATION signalLHP LENS HOME POSITION signalLNSLD LENS SOLENOID DRIVE signalMFSLD MULTIFEEDER PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE signalMLOCK MAIN MOTOR CONSTANT SPEED signalMMCLK MAIN MOTOR CLOCK PULSE signalMMD MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signalPAC_OUT PRIMARY CORONA AC BIAS signalPAC_S PRIMARY CORONA AC DETECTION signalPDC_PWM DC BIAS CONTROL signalPDC_S DC VOLTAGE MONITOR signalPDP VERTICAL PATH ROLLER PAPER DETECTION signalPR_DC_ON PRIMARY CHARGING DC BIAS ON signalPUSLD PICKUP CLUTCH SOLENOID DRIVE signalPWM_1KHz SCANNING LAMP INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT signalPWOFF POWER SWITCH OFF signalRGSLD REGISTRATION CLUTCH SOLENOID DRIVE signalRLOFF RELAY DRIVE signalRPD PRE-REGISTRATION ROLLER PAPER DETECTION signalSB_LP SIDE BLANK EXPOSURE LAMP ON signalSC_A SCANNER MOTOR PULSE signal ASC_B SCANNER MOTOR PULSE signal BSC_COM SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE signalSCHP SCANNER HOME POSITION signalSFPD SINGLE-FEEDER PAPER DETECTION signalT_FEEDBACK TRANSFER BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signalT_FW_DRV TRANSFER DC BIAS CONTROL signal
T_FW_ON TRANSFER DC BIAS ON signalT_FW_S TRANSFER CURRENT DETECTION signalT_REV_ON TRANSFER POSITIVE DC BIAS ON signalTH1 FIXING THERMISTOR signalTH2 SCANNER THERMISTOR signal
2. AbbreviationsAER AE (MEASUREMENT) ROTATIONINTR INITIAL ROTATIONLSTR LAST ROTATIONSCFW SCANNER FORWARDSCRV SCANNER REVERSESTBY STANDBY
What follows below is a list of signals and abbreviations used in the chapters of the manual and circuit diagrams.The abbreviations within parentheses represent analog signals, which cannot be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-5COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11J109
+24
VU
+24
VU
GN
D
+5V
+24
VU
+24
VU
123456
1 2 3 4 5 6J51
1J52
2
2 1
J5321
12
SL
SL3 SL1
SL
SL2
J54
SL
12
21 1 32
3 2 1J55
SL4
SL23 1J56
PS2
J57
PS5
23 1
3J113
1 2
DIG
2
GN
D
3J132
1 2 4 5
+5V
+24
VU
GN
D
SL5
SL
1
2J58
2
1
J59
PS4
23 1
3
GN
D
J1141 2
GN
D
GN
D
4 5
GN
D
6 7 8
J60 12345678
J10821 543
GN
D
+5V
J751 3 2 1
Q751
J11021 543 6
M
M2
J1061 2
+24
VU
J602
1 2
J601
21
J3 VZ1 J4
J111
DIG
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
DIG
1
DIG
2
DIG
3
GN
D
+5V
DIG
4163
J301
21 54 11876 109 141312 15 191817
2
1 2
1
J302 J303
J102
1 742 3 65 98
DIG
1
DIG
1
GN
D
DIG
3
GN
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
J62
1
PS3
3
2
J61
J433TH1
J103
12345678
J2031 432 65 7 8
7
J104
6 5 4 3 2
2J204
1 43 5 6 7
1
6
2
GN
D
J105
GN
D
+24
VR
+5V
56
+5V
+24
VU
34
J2022 31 54
1
To ADF1
4
3
2
J107
1 32 4
GN
D
+24
VR
J60134
32
1
1
2
4
AE
1J301
PS1
32
J601
3 24 1
J101
3
+5V
GN
D
12
J131
21
GN
D
TH2
+24
VU
J130
1 2
FM1
J24F
J910
2 31
1
2J201
1
2
J501FJ501
1
2
JP502FT4FT2H
N FT1 FT3 JP501
J1
N FT1
J1
H FT2
J501
NF1
NF1
FT31
2FT4
Line filterLF1
J502
2
1
T302
J213
J212
J209
BP704
BP702
BP703
BP701
BP706
BP707
BP705
J14
J15
VZ2
J13SP
TR
J12J11
PR
DVJ205
3 2 14
GN
D
+24
VU
1
3
2
4
M
M1
J901
J2
2 1
J207
1
22
1
J434
2
1
J16
J15
H1
J17
FU2
FU1
FT6
FT5
LA1
DC CONTROLLER PCB
COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY PCB
HVT BOARD 1HVT BOARD 2
MAIN MOTOR DRIVER PCB
SENSOR PCB
SIDE BLANK EXPOSURE PCB CONTROL PANEL PCB
Power switch
NOISE FILTER PCB
NOISE FILTER PCB
AE SENSOR PCB
[220/240V]
[120V]
To ADF
DS1Door switch
DS1Door switch
Scanner homeposition sensor
Scannerthermistor
Scannercooling fan
AF
RE
F
AE
SC
HP
TH
2
FM
1D*
LNS
LD*
PU
SLD
*
RG
SLD
*
MF
SLD
*
LHP
Lens solenoid
Pickup clutchsolenoid
Registrationclutch solenoid
Multifeederpickup solenoid
Lens homeposition sensor
Single-feederpaper sensor
Cassettepickup solenoid
Vertical path rollerpaper sensor
SF
PD
CP
US
D*
PD
P
RE
Q
AC
K
TX
D
RX
D
RP
D
Pre-registration rollerpaper sensor
SC
_B
SC
_B*
SC
_CO
M
SC
_A*
SC
_CO
M
SC
_A
Scanner/lensdrive motor
SB
_LP
*
Varistor 1Fixing film
SE
G0*
SE
G1*
SE
G2*
SE
G3*
SE
G4*
SE
G5*
SE
G6*
SE
G7*
KR
0
KR
1
PW
OF
F
DS
VR
Delivery sensor
Fixing thermistor
TH
1
HE
AT
0
HE
AT
1
DP
D
AC
K*
RLO
FF
*
PR
_DC
_ON
CP
S_R
EQ
MM
D
DV
_AC
_ON
DV
_DC
_ON
ST
BY
/CP
Y*
PW
OF
F
S_I
N
MLO
CK
HE
AT
_TR
G
ZE
R_C
RS
S_C
LK
S_O
UT
Varistor 2
Main motor
MLO
CK
MM
D
Fixing heater
Thermal fuse 2
Thermal fuse 1 Scanning lamp
(Multifeeder type only)
(Single-feeder type only)
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM1. Copier
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2. ADF
4 3 2 134 2 1
34
2
34
2
1124
15 GND BLL
+5V BR
+24V
GNDD
OR
GN
J24
J202
To composite power supply
To DC controller 43
21
J114
68
75
J23
Y
BL
VACK
REQ
GND
GND
L
L BL
54 TxD GY
63 GNDL BL
72 RxD W
81 GNDL BL87
65
12
34
78
65
34
21
78
56
43
12
J2
J1
22 1
1J6
FG Y/GN
Y
OR
W
GY
V
OR
GN
AD
FCO
R
OR
+24V
COMNO
MS1ADFSwitch
42
13
65
74
21
35
67
J3
41 2 3
J5
5 6 7 8 91 2 43 5 76 8 9
ADF CONTROLLER PCB
4 42
13
21
355
M1 Belt motor
22 M1 Pickup motor
1 1
6 5
1 2
34 2
43 5
1
6J105
PD
P3*
GY
GN
DB
L
+5V
BR
PD
P2*
V
GN
DB
L
+5V
BR
PD
P1
Y
GN
DB
L
+5V
BR
23 1J203
VBR
BL
PI3
sensorOriginal placementRegistration
sensor
PI2
J20223 1
Deliverysensor
PI1
J20123 1
VBR
BL
Color coding
BK BLACKBL BLUEBR BROWNGY GRAYGN GREENOR ORANGEPK PINKR REDSB SKY-BLUEV VIOLETW WHITEY YELLOW(M3) (M4)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-7COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
100
99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
PA
7
PA
6
PA
5
PA
4
PA
3
PA
2
PA
1
PA
0
Vss
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
AV
ss
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
Vre
fA
Vcc
P47
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
Vcc
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
Vss
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
75
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61+5V
+5V
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
MD2
MD1
MD0
P66
P65
P64
P63
Vcc
XTAL
EXTAL
Vss
NMI
RES*
STBY*
PHAI
P62
P61
P60
Vss
P53
P52
P51
P50
P27
P26
Vcc
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
RESO*
Q101
Vss
P90
P91
P92
P93
P94
P95
P40
P41
P42
P43
Vss
P44
P45
P46
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
8
ZER_CRS_LEVEL
E0_BUCK
FM1D
D_L_2D_L_2
HEAT_PWM
PU_SL
SC_I_SEL1
SC_INA
SC_INA*
SC_INB
SC_INB*
S_IN
S_OUT 2
1 3
S_CLK
REQ
TXD
2
1 3
2
13
MFSLD
5V
D_L_1
LS_HP_CPU
RG_PD_CPU
ZER_CRS_EDGE
AD<7..0>
NF101
31
2
R370
R372
R368
R373
R374
DIGIT<4..0>
SEG<7..0> KEY<7..0>KEY<7..0>
CPS_REQ*
PR_DC_ON*
DV_DC_ON*
DV_AC_ON*
SB_ON
M1_ON*
REQ*
SC_I_SEL3
SC_I_SEL2
STBY/CPY
M1_LOCK_CPU
COMP_CLR
CPS_ACK_CPU*
SC_HP_CPU
RETRY_PD_CPU
E0_DT
HEAT_ERR_CPU*
HEAT_OFF
POWER_OFF*
RGSLD
PUSLD
LNSLD
0
1
2
3
4
776543210 76543210
C104
C1938 8
C202 C218
C102
C192
C191
X101
C103
23
1
C105
OUT
GND
Q105
VCC
R103
R270
R369
R104
+5V
R269
+5V
R106 R105
+5V
Q157
Q182
Q149
Q152
Q104
Q103
REQ*
Q102
R101
ACK R219
R102
+5V
R302
+5V
+5V
R218
+5V +5V
R301
+5V
R299
+5V
C101
C162 D201
D202
Q183RXD R210
R211
+5V +5V
R300
+5V
C157 D200
D203
ADF type only
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAMDC Controller Circuit Diagram (1/8)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit DIagram (2/8)
Q165
SC_I_SEL3
+5V
R277
SC_I_SEL1R117
Q112
SC_I_SEL2
SC_INB*
SC_INB
SC_INA*
SC_INA
R267
Q155
R115O
UT
A*
1
TdA
2
RE
FA
3
GA
4
INA
*5
INA
6
VS
A7
OU
TA
8
RS
A9
RS
B10
OU
TB
*11
VS
B12
TdB
13
RE
FB
14
GB
15
INB
*16
INB
17
OU
TB
18
R114
R111
R107 R108C109
C263 C264 C265 C266
R113
Q109
R112
SC_COM
SC_B
SC_B*
SC_A
SC_A*
+5V
R224R225R226R227
+5V
+5V
R109
C108
+5V
R399
+24VU
C166
C106C107
C165 C164 C163
32
1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-9COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (3/8)
R119
R118
VR1022
31
+5V
C184
Q106
+24VR
-
+
2
31
8
4
R266AEREF
R265
R264
R263
VR103
2
31
+5V
C186
C185
C111
C155
Q106
+24VR
-
+
6AE
57
8
4
R206R120
AE_DATA
R121
ZD101
21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (4/8)
D106CDP5 1 2
D108DPD3 1 2
D109SFPD7 1 2
D218SERVICE2 1 2
D113HEAT13 1 2
D102HEAT02
8
7 7 KR7
8KEY<7..0>
1 2
D114[CPM1]DIG1
D114
10CPM 12/13CPMKR6 1 2
D115[CPM0]DIG0KR6 1 2
D103[SIZE0]DIG3KR2 1 2
D190[SIZE1]DIG0
D103
D190
AB/inch inch
KR5 1 2
D214[VOL1]DIG4
D214
120V 220/240VKR3
R127
6 6 KR6R128
5 5 KR5R129
4 4 KR4R130
3 3 KR3R131
2 2 KR2R132
1 1 KR1R133
0 0 KR0R134
5DIGIT<4..0>
0
8SEG<7..0>
0
R138
R236
R22
8
R240 R243 R242 R241 R358
C16
8
R23
5
C17
5
R23
4
C17
4
R23
3
C17
3
R23
2
C17
2
R23
1
C17
1
R23
0
C17
0
R22
9
C16
9
Q121
DIG0
+5V
1 R137
R239Q124
DIG1
+5V
2 R136
R238Q123
DIG2
+5V
3 R135
R237Q122
DIG3
+5V
4 R360
R362Q202
DIG4
+5V
Q11332 SEG0*
1
1 Q11432 SEG1*
1
2 Q11532 SEG2*
1
3 Q11632 SEG3*
1
4 Q11732 SEG4*
1
5 Q11832 SEG5*
1
6 Q11932 SEG6*
1
7 Q12032 SEG7*
1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-11COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (5/8)
12
R145
+
Q1313
2
1
R158
R149
R140
R139
E0_DT
R148
Q107
+5V
-
+
2
31 2
1 5
3 4VSS
IN A
IN B VDD
OUT X
8
4
R275
ZER_CRS_EDGE
+5V
R279
R293
VR1052 BL_VR
31
+5V
R278
R294
VR1042 RGAD_VR
31
+5V
R382
VR1072 OP_VR
31
+5V
R292
VR1062 LS_VR
31
+5V
R144
+5V
+5V
C183
C181C126
C167
+5VQ153
ZER_CRS_LEVEL
D183
R150R154
R271
ZER_CRS
SW101(AB/inch type only)
R143
4
1 CP23
CPGND11
D_L_2
D_L_1
321
Q126
JP101
JP102
3E0_BUCK2
Q125
31
+24VU
D118
2 1
12
C123
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (6/8)
LNSLDQ145
32
1
LNSLD*
D211
21
D125
21
D126
21
D127
21
D124
21
+24VU
R165
PUSLDQ144
32
1
PUSLD*R162
RGSLDQ143
32
1
RGSLD*R161
MFSLDQ142
32
1
MFSLD*R166
FM1DQ200
FM1D*R352
CPUSDQ201
CPUSD*R353
SB_ON
CPS_ACK_CPU*
AD<7..0> 8
M1_ON*
Q1333
2
1
SB_LP*R160
R163
ACK*R182
TH1
M_TH
0 R173
TH21 R174
AE_DATA2 R175
DSVR3 R176
OP_VR4 R177
LS_VR5 R207
RGAD_VR6 R178
BL_VR7 R179
M1_LOCK_CPU* MLOCKR183
HEAT_ERR_CPU* HEAT_ERR*R172
LS_HP_CPU LHPR171
CPS_REQ*Q134
Q137
32
1
CPS_REQ
PR_DC_ON*Q1363
2
1
PR_DC_ON
DV_DC_ON*Q1353
2
1
DV_DC_ON
DV_AC_ON*Q1383
2
1
DV_AC_ON
STBY/CPYQ1403
2
1
STBY/CPY*
32
1
+5V
MMD
R164
C127
C134 C135 C154 C136 C137 C138 C139 C133
C132 C141 C140
SC_HP_CPU SCHPR169
RETRY_PD_CPU PDPR356
C250 C129
RG_PD_CPU RPDR170
C128
R244
R361
R245R246R250
+5V
R249
R181
+5V
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-13COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (7/8)
D184
D185
POWER_OFF*
HEAT_ERR*
COMP_CLR
R189
R188
Q146
32
1
Q147
32
1
+5V
R186
R187
+5V
R196
+5V
+1
2
C142
R193
R192
R190
+5V
Q107
+5V
–
+
6
57
8
4
R191
R212R214
D128
2 1
D133
2 1
RLOFF*
HEAT_TRG
C143
+5V
Q151
+5V
Q108
+5V
+
–
3
21
8
4
C176
Q108
+5V
+
–
5
67
8
4
C161
C160
Q158
Q160
Q1483
2
1
M_TH
HEAT_PWM
D132
2 1HEAT_OFF
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (8/8)
R385R200+5V
+5V
J1011R363
+5V
+24VU
+5V
R365
J1013SCHP
J1021TH1
J1022DIG1
J1023HEAT0
J1024DIG1
J1025HEAT1
DIG3
DPD
J1026
J1053
J1054
J1055
J1056
J1141
J1142
J1051
J1052
J1012
R388R197J1027
R364J1028
J1029
PDP
R386R351J1323
J1324
J1325
DIG2
SFPD
R389R216J1131
R367J1132
J1133
STBY/CPY*J1031
DV_AC_ONJ1032
DV_DC_ONJ1033
PR_DC_ONJ1034
CPS_REQJ1035
MMDJ1036
ACK*J1037
RLOFF*J1038
DIG0
REQ
J1143
J1144
ACK
J1145
J1146
TXD
J1147
J1148
RXD
J1074
J1073
J1072
J1071
AEREF
AE
+24VR
J1311
J1312
TH2
J1301
J1302FM1D*
J1111
DIG1J1112
DIG2J1113
DIG3J1114
SEG0*J1115
SEG1*J1116
SC_COMJ1101
SC_B*J1102
SC_BJ1103
J1104
SC_A*J1105
SC_AJ1106
J1096
MFSLD*J1097
J1098
J1099
LHP+5V
+24VU
J10910
J10911
1count2
1count1
LNSLD*J1091
J1092
J1093
J1094
RGSLD*
PUSLD*
J1095
SEG2*J1117
SEG3*J1118
SEG4*J1119
SEG5*J11110
SEG6*J11111
SEG7*J11112
MLOCKJ1041
HEAT_TRGJ1042
ZER_CRSJ1043
S_CLKJ1044
S_OUTJ1045
S_INJ1046
PWOFFJ1047
J1081
J1082
CDP
DIG3
RPDJ1083
+5V
J1084
J1085
TP1021
TP1031
TP1011
DIG2JP103
SERVICEJP104
KR5J2011
DIG2J2012
SB_LP*J1061
J1062
KR4J2013
DIG3J2014
KR6J2015
KR7J2016
C259
C203
C268
C205 C204 C210 C209 C208 C207 C206
KR0J11113
KR1J11114
PWOFFJ11115
J11116
J11117
DSVRJ11118
DIG4J11119
C258 C257 C262+5V
J1321CPUSD*
C251
C260 C261 C253
FB101
J1322
C252
C267
FB102
+24VU
+1
2
C146
+5V
+1
2
C151
+5V
+1
2
C149C147 C201
+24VR
+1
2
C150C152C145
C255C254
+24VU
C148
ADF type only
+24VU
C256
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-15COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
E. ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAMADF Controller Circuit Diagram (1/3)
XTAL1
64R
ES
*63
P66
/IRQ
2*62
P65
/IRQ
1*61
P64
/IRQ
0*60
P63
/FTI
59P
62/F
TOB
58P
61/F
TOA
57P
60/F
TCI
56P
37/D
755
P36
/D6
54P
35/D
553
P34
/D4
52P
33/D
351
P32
/D2
50P
31/D
149
P30
/D0
2EXTAL
3MD1
4MD0
5NMI*
6Vcc
7STBY*
8Vss
9P40/TMCI0
10P41/TMO0
11P42/TMRI0
12P43/TMCI1
13P44/TMO1
14P45/TMRI1
15P46/PHI
16P47/E
P10/A048
47P11/A1
46P12/A2
45P13/A3
44P14/A4
43P15/A5
42P16/A6
41P17/A7
40Vss
39P20/A8
38P21/A9
37P22/A10
36P23/A11
35P24/A12
34P25/A13
33P26/A14
P50
/TX
DO
17 18P
51/R
XD
O19
P52
/SC
K0
20P
53/T
XD
121
P54
/RX
D1
22P
55/S
CK
123
P70
/IS*
24P
71/O
S*
25P
72/B
US
Y*
26P
73/IO
S*
27P
74/A
S*
28P
75/W
R*
29P
76/R
D30
P77
/WA
IT*
31V
cc32
P27
/A15
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
15
TXD
RX
D
DM
0
DM
1
WD
LED
AD
FC
PD
P3
PD
P2
PD
P1
NC
NC
RD*
+5V
+5V
C8 C22R44
A
A*
B
B*
ACK
REQNC
NC
+5V
R5
R6
C7
X1
C6R4
+5V
R3
JP1
Q1
+5V
8RESET*
Vs7
Vref6
Vcc5
GND4
3Ck
2RESET
1Ct
WD
Q3
+D1
C5
+5V
R2
PS
W
RE
SE
T*
DIG
IT3
DIG
IT2
DIG
IT1
DIG
IT0
DIP
SW
1
DIP
SW
0
7
D7
D6
6
D5
5
D4
4
D3
3
D2
2
D1
1
D0
0
A7 A13
A64
A8
A12
VPP2
3
1VCC
A14
Q2
25
27
26
28
5A5
6A4
7A3
8A2
9A1
10A0
11O1
12O2
13O3
14GND
A924
A1123
OE*22
A1021
CE*20
O819
O718
O617
O516
O415
+5V
12 A12
A77
A66
A55
A44
A33
A22
A11
A00
0 D0
1 D1
2 D2
14A14
A13 13
A8 8
A9 9
A11 11
15
10
A15
A10
D3 3
D4 4
D5 5
D6 6
D7 7
C9
16
8
R13J1
+
J14
C1
+5V
CP1
J1
J1
2
1
C2 +
CB1
1J6 J6
2
Q11+24V ZD1
C21
+5V
R45
ADFC C10
+5V
14
7GNDVCC
HC14
Q6
C3
C4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
ADF Controller Circuit Diagram (2/3)
2TdA
GND4
INA6
OUTA8VSA
7
5INA*
3VrefA
1OUTA*
Q4
C11
+5V
R10
Q8
+5V
R16
LED J72
1J7
6J3OUT2
5 OUTA*2IN2
IN11
OUT13 OUTA 7
J3
4
GND
67
+24V
NCVCC
Q5
DM1
TP1
7
DM0 6
TP1
C12
R11
+5V
9RSA
11OUTB*
13TdB
15GND
17INB
+24V
RSB10
VSS12
VrefB14
INB*16
OUTB18
MB* 4J3
MA* 3J3
MA 5J3
MB 2J3
1J3
+24V
+24V
R13
C14
R15
R14
C13
+5V
R8
R9
R12
B
TP1
3
A*
TP1
2
A
TP1
1
B*
TP1
4
TP15NC
TP1
10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-17COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
ADF Controller Circuit Diagram (3/3)
Q10
TXD
1J5
R43
R28
DIGIT0
R27
R26
R25
+5V
DIGIT1
DIGIT2
DIGIT3
1
2
4
8
SW2
5
2J5
3J5
R24
+5V
R23
+5V
TP1
9PDP1
C18
R22
TP1
C17
PDP2 R42 8
R21
5
4
+5V
6
J5
J5
J5
+5V
R20
C16
PDP3 R41
R19
8
7
+5V
9
J5
J5
J5
+5V
2J2
R36
+5V
RXD
3J2
1J2
4J2
+5V
R33
C20
R34RXD R35
D3
HC141312
Q6
HC14
Q6
10 11
HC14
Q6
8 9
HC14
Q6
6 5
L1
R38
+5V
R37
DIPSW1
TXD
Q6
HC144 3
32
DIPSW0 41
SW1
R39
+5V
PSW
SW3
ACK
REQREQ
ACK
R30R31
Q9
Q6
HC142 1
C19
D2
6
5J2
J2
+5V
R32
R29
7J2
8J2
+5V
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-19COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
F. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DIAGRAMComposite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A502] (1/8)
AC_INPUT
D603
R606
D606
C613
Q608
R602
C609
Q616
Q617
Q621
C604
Q605
VIN_1SR139
C818
C603
R601
R600
Q615
R616
R801
R609C620
R61
3
R61
0
R61
2
R611
R615R614
D62
0
D810
R620 D605
<A508>
<A504>
5V_ON*
ZER_CRS
AC_MONITOR
HEAT_TRG
<A508>
<A508>
<A508>Q620
AC1<A509>
C601
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V+5V
Q607R607
D604
C605
L600
SQ
600
R622
R603Q611
<A503>
<A503>
J207
FIX_HT_H
AC_H_AF
AC_N_AF
<A508>RLOFF*
FIX_HT_N
Q614
R62
3
R62
1
RL601
T600D601
C60
2
D602
1
1
2 3
4
2
AC_H
AC_N
J201
+
+
+
+
IN OUTGND
2
2 31
13
2
1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A503] (2/8)
AC_N_AF
AC_H_AF
AC_HA
R116
TH101
TH102
FB104
FU102
Q105
AC_LA
<A502>
<A509>
<A509>
<A502>
MPWM
MPWM_INV
<A508>
<A504>
Q113
C588
D542
D543R644
R108
D121
D106D111
To radiator plate
R184
R104
24VOFF
LOW_GU
LOW_G
HV_H
MV_H
MV_L
HV_L
24VON
R105
R106
D122
D124
D125
D123
Q118
T103
C101
C15
1 C15
7C
156
D11
0
Q10
4Q
103
C13
8
C10
2R
111
R11
4
Q10
1
C10
5
C10
6
C10
7
R16
3
C10
4
R103R109
T101
R110
T104PROTECT
<A508>
L103
+
+
+
+
+5V
+5V
1
13
2 9
<A504>
<A504>
<A504>
<A504>
<A506>
<A505>
<A505>
<A506>
10
11
1213
14
15
16
1
5
3
6
7
24
2
3
4
<NC=8>
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-21COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A504] (3/8)
MPWM_INV<A508>
R136
R155
C122
D107
R138
Q109
D105
FB102
FB103
T105R128C153
R167
R131
+24VR
C125 R130R145
+5V
+5V
+ +
+
L101
+5V
R169
R148R156
D119
+24VR
4
8
41
3
2
C143
C145
C144
D120R147
R132R144
D109
C142
C129
CLIMIT<A508>
R125
R186
R185
C103
R151
C160R153
D131
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+
++
+
Q117C118
C136
+24VR
+24VR
D118
D117
C137
Q117
R129
C135
R124R122
R123R127
D132
J202
ZD103
ZD101
R115
R149
R165
R158
R139
R157
L180
L181Q180
C180
C183
C133
D104
D103 R118
C115 C116 R119
<A508>
C181 C182
R182
R181
R18
0
C18
4
D18
0F
B18
0
DC24V_S
C141
FB10124VOFF<A503>
TIM<A508>
<A503>
<A503>
<A503>
LOW_G
LOW_GU
24VON
R121
C132
C134
D130
D129
Q108
ZD102
+24VU
O.C.P.1
O.C
.P.2
O.V
.P
Q116
C127
<A502>VIN_1SR139
R168
R15
0
R14
1 C12
0
R15
2
R13
4
C12
6
Q116
Q115
C154
Q111C139 C140
R154
C152
Q110
Q115
C146
Q107
+5V
R160D10
8
R15
9
R146
T101
16
13
14
15
13
24
4
6
5
8
7
28
34
1
8
3
21
4
857
6
74
86
5
1 63 42 5
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
Cs
Es
Ct
GND
Cd
Si
V+
INV
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A505] (4/8)
3
44
1
12
2 5
3
10
9
C512R514
R212
PAC_OUT JP140
PDC_PWM
<A508>
Q201
R211
C202
C204
D202
R209
R206
C206
<A508>
<A503>
<A503>
PDC_S
R205
R203
C201R202
T101
MV_H
MV_L
<A508>
JP202
PAC
_S<
A50
8>
C561
C509
C207
R201
C611
C513
C538
JP148
C539
R521
R516R591
R54
9R
592
+24VR
+24VR
R550
C510
Q526
T508
+
+
+
J209PRIMARY
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-23COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A506] (5/8)
JP20
1
R210<A503>
<A503>
C218
C215
<A508>
<A508>
<A508>ACBIAS
BIAS_S
BIAS_PWM
R243
R207
C219
D215
C208
D214
R237
R239
R208
+5V
Q206
R238 C221T201
D20
7
D20
6
D20
8
D20
9
D21
0
C213C211
C210 C212 C214 D211 R225
R254
J213
J215
J212
SEPARATION
DEVELOPING
R236
C220
HV_H
HV_L
T101
+
12
11
3 1
24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A507] (6/8)
JP301 C346 C345
+5V
R351 R356
Q321
D325 C344
C343 C321 C380 C382
C381C379C322C342
<A508>
T_REV_R
T_FW_S
HV_LIMIT
<A508>
<A508>
<A508>
T_FW_DRV
T_FEEDBACK
T_FW_ON
<A508>CLK32K
<A508>
<A508>
R393
R392
R31
7
R390
+24VR
C377
R361 R327
T302
J210Transfer output
5
6
2
7
7
1
D306
+24VR
R32
8
R33
8
R32
9
R33
0
R33
7
R332
ZD303
R326C317
Q311
Q325
Q310
C318
D308
R318
C359
VR301
R336
Q308
C31
2
D307
T_REV_ON*
T_REVR352 R353 R354
R388
D32
8
D323
D32
4
D32
2
D34
0 D34
1
D34
2
D34
3
D34
4
D33
9
C32
9
R355HV_H<A503>
HV_L<A503>
D326
T101
+
11
12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-25COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A508] (7/8)
<A504>
<A507>
<A506>
<A505>
<A504>
<A503>
<A504>
<A507>
<A507>
<A507>
+5V
+5V
+5V
<A505> PAC_S
HV_LIMITQ901
RESET
R802VR801
+24VR
NC
JP999
NC
NC
DC24V_S
T_FEEDBACK
BIAS_S
PDC_S
CLIMIT
PROTECT
TIM
T_REV_ON*
T_FW_DRV
T_FW_S
C903
<A509>
<A502> AC_MONITOR
<A509>LAMP_ON
PWM_1KHz
PAC_OUT
5V_ON*
<A505>
<A502>
PWOFF
CPS_REQ
PR_DC_ON
DV_DC_ON
DV_AC_ON
STBY/CPY*
LAMP_DETECT <A509>
T_FW_ON <A507>
ACK*
CLK32K <A507>
NC
NC
+5V
MPWM
PDC_PWM
BIAS_PWM
+24VR
ACBIAS
<A503>
<A505>
<A506>
<A506>
SKGND
S_IN
S_OUT
S_CLK
RLOFF*
ACK*MMD
CPS_REQ
PR_DC_ON
+24VU+24VU
GND
MMD
MLOCK
DV_DC_ONDV_AC_ON
STBY/CPY*
PWOFF
J204
J203
J205
Q900
S_INS_OUT
S_CLK
ZER_CRS <A502>
HEAT_TRGMLOCK
<A502>
<A502>
JP999 : 220 / 240V model only
1
1
2 3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
1
2
4
3
2
1
3
4
5
67
1
23
4
5
67
8
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
IN OUT
GND
PAC_S
+5FBT
HV_LIMIT
MODE1
MODE2
J_CTL
NC
AC_MONI_VR
AC_MONI TOR
AGND
FL_S
+24V
CLIMIT
T_FW_S
T_FW_DRV
T_REV_ON*
TIM
PROTECT
PDC_S
BIAS_S
T_FEEDBACK
DC24V_S
P_C_S
FL_LIGHT_ON*
RESET*
PAC_OUT
5V_ON*
PW_OFF*
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA0
ACK*
CLK32K
PGND
XI
+5V
+24V
S_CLK
S_OUT
S_IN
SKGND
ACBIAS
BIAS_PWM
PDC_PWM
MPWM
MPWM_CLK
XO
T_FW_ON
CPS_REQ*
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A509] (8/8)
R028
R020 R021R013R012
R027 R006 R008 R018
D005 D006 C002
C004
+5V
Q002
D002
Q003
R016
Q011
Q001
C005
<A508>LAMP_DETECT
<A508>
<A508>
PWM_1KHz
LAMP_ON
D004
R01
1
R00
9
R06
3
C003
R029 ZD001
Q005 R030D
003
Q01
2
R01
9
D007
Q0001
D010
D009
D011
D008
AC_HA<502>
<502>AC_LA
C008
R00
4
C00
1R00
5
J910
HIC001
R026
R025
R001
L001
SQ
001
R022
R003
+
+
+VR001
R002
R007 R023
+
4321
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 214
12
43
34
21
2
36
R012, R013, R018, R021 : 220 / 240V model only
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-27COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
J301 13 KR0
J301 14 KR1
J301 1 DIG0
J301 2 DIG1
J301 3 DIG2
J301 4 DIG3
J301 19 DIG4
J301 5 SEG0
SW304
SW308
PRESET COPY RATIO
SW303
ZOOM
CASSETTE/MULTI
SW307
AE
SW302
CLR
SW306
COPY
SW301
–
SW305
+
C303
R301
J301 6 SEG1 R302
J301 7 SEG2 R303
J301 8 SEG3 R304
J301 9 SEG4 R305
J301 10 SEG5 R306
J301 11 SEG6 R307
J301 12 SEG7 R308
LED306
2 1
LED316
LED305
2 1
LED317
LED304
2 1
LED312
2 1
LED303
2 1
LED311
2 1
LED302
LED31520 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D30
42
1
D30
32
1
D30
22
1
D30
12
1
LED310
c
MULTI
b
CASSETTE
a
ZOOM
2 1
2 1
LED308
2 1
LED307
AEJAM
2 1
LED
321
LIF
T
12
LED
320
ME
12
LED
319
TS
12
LED
318
PH
OT
O
12
LED301
e
MAIN_JAM
d
DFJAM
ADF type only
%
2 1
+5V
+5V
C301
C302 17
16
J301
18
DSVR
2
13
J301
15 1PWOFF
J301 2 J303
1J303
J302
2 J302
J301
VR301
SW309
POWER
b2f2
c2e2
b1
c1
d2
g2
a2
b3f3
c3e3
d3
g3
a3
7 SEG DISPLAY
ADF typeonly
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-29
APPENDIX
H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
+24VRR603
R605
R601
C601
Q601PD601
C603 R606
R602
J601-1
C602
+24VR
+
2
31
8
4
J601-2
R604Q601
+24VR
+
6
57
8
4 J601-3
J601-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)A-30
APPENDIX
I. SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
+5VJ751-2
RPDJ751-3
R751 GNDJ751-1
Q751
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-31
APPENDIX
J. NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
AC_HFU501 L501
J501-1
FG
AC_NJ501-2
JP502
JP501
C503
C502C501R501
C504
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)A-32
APPENDIX
K. HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
JP70121
JP702
21
PRBP701
R704JP70321
JP704
21
SPBP702
JP70521
JP706
21
DVBP703
R701JP70721
JP708
21
TRBP704
R702JP70921
JP710
21
[PR_IN]BP705
JP71121
JP712
21
[GND_IN]BP706
R703JP71321
12
12
JP714
21
[DV_IN]BP707
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-33
APPENDIX
L. BLANK EXPOSURE (front) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
LA601
J601
J601
2
1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)A-34
APPENDIX
M. BLANK EXPOSURE (rear) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
LA602
J602
J602
2
1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-35
APPENDIX
N. SPECIAL TOOLS
You will need the following special tool(s) in addition to the standard tools set when servicingthe machine.
For checking the cas-sette spring pressureRange of measure-ments: 0 to 1,500g
No
CK-0054
ShapeTool Tool No. Rank* Remarks
Spring gauge
Mirror position-ing tool (pair forfront and rear)
1 FY9-3009 B For adjusting the dis-tance between the No.1and No.2 mirrors.
Wire clip2 FY9-3017 B For fixing the scannerwire in place while ad-justing its tension.
3 B
*Rank:A: Each service person is expected to carry one.B: Each five or so service persons is expected to carry one.C: Each workshop is expected to carry one.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)A-36
APPENDIX
O. SOLVENTS/OILS
No.1
2
3
4
Remarks• Do not bring near
fire.• Procure locally.• Isopropyl alcohol
may be substituted.• Do not bring near
fire.• Procure locally.• CK-0451 (100cc)
• CK-0551 (20g)
CompositionHydrocarbon (fluorine family)AlcoholSurface active agent
Hydrocarbon(fluorine/chlorine family)AlcoholMineral oil(paraffin family)Silicone oil
UsesCleaning: e.g.,glass, plastic,rubber parts;external covers
Cleaning: e.g.,metal; oil ortoner dirtLubricatingspring clutchLubricatingdrive andfriction parts,scanner rail
NameAlcohol
Solvent
Lubricating oil
Lubricating oil
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Prepared byOffice Imaging Products Technical Support Division
CANON INC.Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (AUG. 1999) (30359/10317)
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0899AB2.135-1PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
This pubication is printed on
70% reprocessed paper.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine